Frn001g11s-2ux Im by Jalan Lurus

Instruction Manual

FRENIC 5000G11S/P11S

High-Performance, Low-Noise General-Purpose Industrial Machines 230V Series 0.25HP/FRNF25G11S-2UX to 125HP/FRN125G11S-2UX 460V Series 0.50HP/FRNF50G11S-4UX to 600HP/FRN600G11S-4UX

Inverter

Fans and Pumps 230V Series 7.5HP/FRN007P11S-2UX to 150HP/FRN150P11S-2UX 460V Series 7.5HP/FRN007P11S-4UX to 800HP/FRN800P11S-4UX

ďź

CAUTION

Q Read all operating instructions before installing, connecting (wiring), operating, servicing, or inspecting the inverter. Q Ensure that this instruction manual is made available to the final user of the inverter. Q Store this manual in a safe, convenient location. Q The product is subject to change without prior notice.

Fuji Electric Systems Co., Ltd. Fuji Electric Corp of America

INR-SI47-1206a-E

Preface Thank you four purchasing our FRENIC5000G11S or FRENIC5000P11S series inverter. This product is used to drive a 3-phase electric motor at variable speed. As incorrect use of this product may result in personal injury and/or property damage, read all operating instructions before using. As this manual does not cover the use of option cards, etc., refer to relevant manuals for option operations.

Safety Instructions Read this manual carefully before installing, connecting (wiring), operating, servicing, or inspecting the inverter. Familiarize yourself with all safety features before using the inverter. In this manual, safety messages are classified as follows:

WARNING

Improper operation may result in serious personal injury or death.

Improper operation may result in slight to medium personal injury or property damage. Situations more serious than those covered by CAUTION will depend on prevailing circumstances. Always follow instructions.

CAUTION

Instructions on use WARNING • This inverter is designed to drive a 3-phase induction motor and is not suitable for a single-phase motor or others, as fire may result. • This inverter may not be used (as is) as a component of a life-support system or other medical device directly affecting the personal welfare of the user. • This inverter is manufactured under strict quality control standards. However, safety equipment must be installed if the failure of this device may result in personal injury and/or property damage. There is a risk of accident.

Instructions on installation WARNING • Mount this inverter on an incombustible material such as metal. There is a risk of fire. • Do not place combustible or flammable material near this inverter, as fire may result.

CAUTION • Do not hold or carry this inverter by the surface cover. Inverter may be dropped causing injury. • Ensure that the inverter and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, paper dust, small chips of wood or metal, and dust), as fire or accident may result. • Do not install or operate a damaged inverter or an inverter with missing parts, as injury may result.

Instructions on wiring WARNING • Connect the inverter to power via a line-protection molded-case circuit breaker or Fuse, as fire may result. • Always connect a ground wire, as electric shock or fire may result. • A licensed specialist must perform the wiring works, as electric shock may result. • Turn off the power before starting the wiring work, as electric shock may result. • Wire the inverter after installation is complete, as electric shock or injury may occur.

CAUTION • Confirm that the phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply, as injury may result. • Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U,V,and W), as injury may result. • Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals (P(+)and N(-)), as fire may result. • Ensure that the noise generated by the inverter, motor, or wiring does not adversely affect peripheral sensors and equipment, as accident may result.

Instructions on operation WARNING • Be sure to install the surface cover before turning on the power (closed). Do not remove the cover while power to the inverter is turned on. Electric shock may occur. • Do not operate switches with wet hands, as electric shock may result. • When the retry function is selected, the inverter may restart automatically after tripping. (Design the machine to ensure personal safety in the event of restart) Accident may result. • When the torque limiting function is selected, operating conditions may differ from preset conditions (acceleration/deceleration time or speed). In this case, personal safety must be assured. Accident may result. • As the STOP key is effective only when a function setting has been established, install an emergency switch independently, and when an operation via the external signal terminal is selected, the STOP key on the keypad panel will be disabled. Accident may result. • As operations start suddenly if alarm is reset with a running signal input, confirm that no running signal is input before resetting alarm. Accident may result. • Do not touch inverter terminals when energized even if inverter has stopped. Electric shock may result.

CAUTION • Do not start or stop the inverter using the main circuit power. Failure may result. • Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot. Burns may result. • As the inverter can set high speed operation easily, carefully check the performance of motor or machine before changing speed settings. Injury may result. • Do not use the inverter braking function for mechanical holding. Injury may result.

Instructions on maintenance, inspection, and replacement WARNING • Wait a minimum of five minutes (30HP or less) or ten minutes (40HP or more) after power has been tumed off (open) before starting inspection. (Also confirm that the charge lamp is off and that DC voltage between terminals P (+) and N (-) do not exceed 25V.) Electrical shock may result. • Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance, inspection, and replacement operations.(Take off metal jewelry such as watches and rings. Use insulated tools.) Electric shock or injury may result.

Instructions on disposal CAUTION • Treat as industrial waste when disposing it. Injury may result.

Other instructions WARNING • Never modify the product. Electric shock or injury may result.

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe CAUTION • The contact capacity of alarm output for any fault (30A, B, C) and relay signal output (Y5A, Y5C) is 0.5A at 48V DC. • The ground terminal G should be connected to the ground. Use a crimp terminal to connect a cable to the main circuit terminal or inverter ground terminal. • Where RCD (Residual-current protective device) is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only RCD of type B is allowed on the supply side of this EE (Electric equipment). Otherwise another protective measure shall be applied such as separation of the EE from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation of EE and supply system by the transformer. • Use a single cable to connect the G inverter ground terminal. (Do not use two or more inverter ground terminals.) • Use a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) and magnetic contactor (MC) that conform to EN or IEC standards. • Use the inverter under over-voltage category III conditions and maintain Pollution degree 2 or better as specified in IEC664. To maintain Pollution degree 2 or more, install the inverter in the control panel (IP54 or higher level) having structure free from water, oil, carbon, dust, etc. • For the input-output wiring of the inverter, use cable (diameter and type) as specified in Appendix C in EN60204. • To ensure safety, install an optional AC reactor, DC reactor, or external braking resistor as follows: 1) Install inside an IP4X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are exposed. 2) Install inside an IP2X cabinet or barrier if electrical parts are not exposed. • It is necessary to install the inverter in appropriate method using an appropriate RFI filter to conform to the EMC directive. It is customer's responsibility to check whether the equipment, the inverter is installed in, conforms to EMC directive.

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe CAUTION

50 FRN050P11S-2UX 50 60 60 75 75

FRN050G11S-2UX FRN060P11S-2UX FRN060G11S-2UX FRN075P11S-2UX FRN075G11S-2UX

100 FRN100P11S-2UX 100 FRN100G11S-2UX 125 FRN125P11S-2UX 125 FRN125G11S-2UX 150 FRN150P11S-2UX

1.8

3.5

100

125

6(6)

10 (10)

5.8 35 (16)

175 200

175

250

200

300

1.2 13.5

250

350

13.5

350 400

500

50 (25) 16×2 (16) 70(35) 95 (50) 35×2 (35) 50×2 (50) 185(95) 240 (120) 95×2 (95)

2.5

4(4) 10(10)

16 (16) 35 (16)

50 (25)

2.5

35 50

35 16×2

25×2

70 25×2

95 35×2

3.5 5.5

25×2 (25) 35×2 (35) 50×2 (50) 70×2 (70)

0.2 to 0.75

35×2 50×2

Control

P (+), DB, N (-)

P1, P (+)

2.5 (2.5)

0.7 150

R0, T0

Without DCR

25 (16)

150 100

2.5 (2.5)

20 30

L1/R, L2/S, L3/T ( G)

With DCR

1.2

10 15 15 30 40

Recommended wire size [mm ]

U, V, W

FRNF25G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-2UX FRN001G11S-2UX FRN002G11S-2UX FRN003G11S-2UX FRN005G11S-2UX FRN007P11S-2UX FRN007G11S-2UX FRN010P11S-2UX FRN010G11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX FRN015G11S-2UX FRN020P11S-2UX FRN020G11S-2UX FRN025P11S-2UX FRN025G11S-2UX FRN030P11S-2UX FRN030G11S-2UX FRN040P11S-2UX FRN040G11S-2UX

Without DCR

Control

1/4 1/2 1 2 3 5 7.5 7.5 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 30 30 40 40

With DCR

R0, T0

Inverter type

Tightening torque [N*m] L1/R, L2/S, L3/T U, V, W P1, P (+), DB, N (-)

Fuse/MCCB current rating [A]

Application motor [HP]

3phase 230V system

Voltage

Table 1-1 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe

240 70×2 300 95×2

2.5 to 6

50×2 10 70×2 16 95×2 25 120×2

Note: The type of wire is 75℃ (167ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC). The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature 50℃ (122ºF) or lower.

Conformity to Low Voltage Directive in Europe CAUTION

100 FRN100P11S-4UX 100 125 125 150 150

FRN100G11S-4UX FRN125P11S-4UX FRN125G11S-4UX FRN150P11S-4UX FRN150G11S-4UX

200 FRN200P11S-4UX 200 250 250 300 300 350 350 400 400 450 450 500 500 600 600 700

1.8

2.5 (2.5)

3.5

100

10 (10)

5.8

125 100 125

150

13.5

175

175 0.7 13.5

200 225

300

FRN200G11S-4UX FRN250P11S-4UX 350 FRN250G11S-4UX FRN300P11S-4UX 400 FRN300G11S-4UX FRN350P11S-4UX 500 FRN350G11S-4UX FRN400P11S-4UX 600 FRN400G11S-4UX FRN450P11S-4UX 700 FRN450G11S-4UX FRN500P11S-4UX 800 FRN500G11S-4UX FRN600P11S-4UX 1,000 FRN600G11S-4UX FRN700P11S-4UX

800 FRN800P11S-4UX 1,200

1.2

16 (10) 25 (16) 35 (25) 50 (25) 25×2 (25) 70(35) 95 (50) 50×2 (50) 70×2 (70) 185(95) 240 (120) 120×2 (120)

27 48

2.5 (2.5)

2.5

Control

P (+), DB, N (-)

2.5

6 (6) 6 (6)

P1, P (+)

50 40

Without DCR

10 10

R0, T0

L1/R, L2/S, L3/T ( G)

With DCR

1.2

Recommended wire size [mm ]

U, V, W

FRNF50G11S-4UX FRN001G11S-4UX FRN002G11S-4UX FRN003G11S-4UX FRN005G11S-4UX FRN007P11S-4UX FRN007G11S-4UX FRN010P11S-4UX FRN010G11S-4UX FRN015P11S-4UX FRN015G11S-4UX FRN020P11S-4UX FRN020G11S-4UX FRN025P11S-4UX FRN025G11S-4UX FRN030P11S-4UX FRN030G11S-4UX FRN040P11S-4UX FRN040G11S-4UX FRN050P11S-4UX FRN050G11S-4UX FRN060P11S-4UX FRN060G11S-4UX FRN075P11S-4UX FRN075G11S-4UX

Control

1/2 1 2 3 5 7.5 7.5 10 10 15 15 20 20 25 25 30 30 40 40 50 50 60 60 75 75

With Without DCR DCR

R0, T0

Inverter type

Tightening torque [N*m] L1/R, L2/S, L3/T U, V, W P1, P (+), DB, N (-)

Fuse/MCCB current rating [A]

Application motor [HP]

3phase 460V system

Voltage

Table 1-2 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit in Europe

185×2 (185) 240×2 (240) 185×3 (300) 240×3 (300)

2.5 4

10 (10) 16 (16) 25 (16) 35 (25) 50 (25) 25×2 (25) 35×2 (35)

2.5

25×2

35×2

95 35×2 95 50×2 35×2 70×2

95 50×2

2.5

50×2 95×2 240 120×2 95×2 150×2 120×2 240×2 150×2 240×2 150×3 240×2 185×3 300×2 240×3

70×2 95×2 2.5 240 to 6 120×2 150×2 185×2

0.2 to 0.75

240×2 185×3

240×3 300×3

300×3

Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark] CAUTION Tightening torque and wire range Required torque [lb-inch](N.m) Auxiliary Main controlControl terminal power

Inverter type Voltage

3-phase 230V

3-phase 460V

G11S/P11S FRNF25G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-2UX FRN001G11S-2UX FRN002G11S-2UX FRN003G11S-2UX FRN005G11S-2UX FRN007G11S-2UX FRN007,010P11S-2UX FRN010G11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX FRN015G11S-2UX FRN020P11S-2UX FRN020G11S-2UX FRN025P11S-2UX FRN025G11S-2UX FRN030P11S-2UX FRN030G11S-2UX FRN040G11S/P11S-2UX FRN050P11S-2UX FRN050G11S-2UX FRN060G11S/P11S-2UX FRN075G11S/P11S-2UX FRN100P11S-2UX FRN100G11S-2UX FRN125P11S-2UX FRN125G11S -2UX FRN150P11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-4UX FRN001G11S-4UX FRN002G11S-4UX FRN003G11S-4UX FRN005G11S-4UX FRN007G11S-4UX FRN007,010P11S-4UX FRN010G11S-4UX FRN015P11S-4UX FRN015G11S-4UX FRN020P11S-4UX FRN020G11S-4UX FRN025P11S-4UX FRN025G11S-4UX FRN030P11S-4UX FRN030G11S-4UX FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX FRN100P11S-4UX FRN100G11S-4UX FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX FRN200P11S-4UX FRN200G11S-4UX FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX FRN300P11S-4UX FRN300G11S-4UX FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX FRN450P11S-4UX FRN450G11S-4UX FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX FRN700P11S-4UX FRN800P11S-4UX

―

10.6(1.2)

Wire range [AWG] (mm2) Auxiliary L1/R,L2/S,L3/T controlU,V,W power ―

16 (1.3)

15.9(1.8)

Control

14 (2.1) 10 (5.3) 8 (8.4)

31.0(3.5) 6 (13.3) 4 (21.2) 51.3(5.8)

6.2(0.7) 10.6(1.2)

3 (26.7)

24 (0.2) 16(1.3)

2 (33.6) 1 (42.4)

119(13.5) 1/0 (53.5) 3/0 (85.0) 4/0 (107.2) 1/0X2 (53.5X2) 350(177) 2/0X2 (67.4X2) 500(253) 300X2 (152X2)

239(27)

425(48) ―

10.6(1.2)

― 16 (1.3)

15.9(1.8) 14 (2.1) 12 (3.3) 10 (5.3) 31.0(3.5) 8 (8.4) 6 (13.3) 4 (21.2) 119(13.5)

6.2(0.7) 10.6(1.2)

24 (0.2)

3 (26.7) 2 (33.6) 1/0 (53.5)

16(1.3)

2/0 (67.4) 4/0 (107.2) 1X2 (42.4X2) 250 (127) 350(177)

239(27)

600(304) 300X2(152X2) 350X2(177X2)

425(48)

500X2(253X2) 600X2(304X2) 500X3(253X3) 600X3(304X3)

Use the following power supply to the inverter Inverter Model FRNF25G11S-2UX ～ FRN125G11S-2UX FRN007P11S-2UX ～ FRN150P11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-4UX ～ FRN600G11S-4UX FRN007P11S-4UX ～ FRN800P11S-4UX

Maximum input voltage AC240V

Input source current Not more than 100,000A

AC480V

Compliance with UL/cUL standards [Applicable to products with UL/cUL mark] CAUTION • • • • • • • • • • • •

[CAUTION] Hazard of electrical shock. Disconnect incoming power before working on this control. [CAUTION] Dangerous voltage exists until charge lights is off. [WARNING] More than one live parts inside the inverter. Type1 “INDOOR USE ONLY” The inverter is approved as a part used inside a panel. Install it inside a panel. Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000rms symmetrical amperes. Use 60/75C copper wire only. A Class2 circuit wired with class1 wire. Field wiring connection must be made by a UL Listed and CSA Certified closed-loop terminal connector sized for the wire gauge involved. Connector must be fixed using the crimp tool specified by the connector manufacturer. Connect the power supply to main power supply terminals via the Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) or a ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) to apply the UL Listing Mark. (See Instruction Manual basic connection diagram Fig.2-3-1). In case of using auxiliary control-power input (R0, T0), connect it referring to Basic connection diagram Fig.2-3-1. Solid state motor overload protection is provided in each model.

General instructions Although figures in this manual may show the inverter with covers and safety screens removed for explanation purposes, do not operate the device until all such covers and screens have been replaced.

Contents 1. Before Using This Product ･･･････････････ 1-1 1-1 Receiving Inspections ･･･････････････ 1-1 1-2 Appearance ････････････････････････ 1-1 1-3 Handling the Product ････････････････ 1-2 1-4 Carrying ･･･････････････････････････ 1-3 1-5 Storage ････････････････････････････ 1-3 2. Installation and Connection ･･････････････ 2-1 2-1 Operating Environment ･･････････････ 2-1 2-2 Installation Method ･･････････････････ 2-1 2-3 Connection ･････････････････････････ 2-3 2-3-1 Basic connection ････････････････ 2-3 2-3-2 Connecting the main circuit and ground terminals ･･･････････････ 2-8 2-3-3 Connecting the control terminals ･･ 2-13 2-3-4 Terminal arrangement ･･･････････ 2-16 2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit ････････････････ 2-18 3. Operation ･････････････････････････････ 3-1 3-1 Inspection and Preparation before Operation ････････････････････ 3-1 3-2 Operation Method ･･･････････････････ 3-1 3-3 Trial Run ･･･････････････････････････ 3-1 4. Keypad Panel ･･････････････････････････ 4-1 4-1 Appearance of Keypad Panel ･････････ 4-1 4-2 Keypad Panel Operation System (LCD screen, Level Structure) ････････ 4-2 4-2-1 Normal operation ････････････････ 4-2 4-2-2 Alarm occurrence ･･･････････････ 4-2 4-3 Operating Keypad Panel ･････････････ 4-4 4-3-1 Operation Mode ･････････････････ 4-4 4-3-2 Setting digital frequency ･･････････ 4-4 4-3-3 Switching the LED monitor ････････ 4-5 4-3-4 Menu screen ･･･････････････････ 4-5 4-3-5 Setting function data ･････････････ 4-5 4-3-6 Checking function data ･･･････････ 4-7 4-3-7 Monitoring operating status ･･･････ 4-7 4-3-8 I/O check ･･･････････････････････ 4-8 4-3-9 Maintenance information ･････････ 4-9 4-3-10 Load rate measurement ････････ 4-10 4-3-11 Alarm information ･････････････ 4-11 4-3-12 Alarm history and factors ････････ 4-12 4-3-13 Data copy ････････････････････ 4-13 4-3-14 Alarm mode ･･････････････････ 4-15

5. Function Select ････････････････････････ 5-1 5-1 Function select list ･･････････････････ 5-1 5-2 Function Explanation ････････････････ 5-7 6. Protective Operation ････････････････････ 6-1 6-1 List of Protective Operations ･･････････ 6-1 6-2 Alarm Reset ････････････････････････ 6-2 7. Trouble shooting ･･･････････････････････ 7-1 7-1 Protective function activation ･････････ 7-1 7-2 Abnormal motor rotation ･････････････ 7-5 8. Maintenance and Inspection ･････････････ 8-1 Daily Inspection ･････････････････････ 8-2 Periodical Inspection ････････････････ 8-3 Measurement of Main Circuit Electrical Quantity ･･･････････････････ 8-4 Insulation Test ･･････････････････････ 8-5 Parts Replacement ･･････････････････ 8-6 Inquiries about Products and Product Guarantee ･････････････････

8-1 8-1 8-1 8-4 8-5 8-5 8-5

9. Specifications ･･････････････････････････ 9-1 9-1 Standard Specifications ･･････････････ 9-1 9-2 Common Specifications ･･････････････ 9-3 9-3 Outline Dimensions ･････････････････ 9-4 9-4 RS-485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications ･･･････････････････ 9-8 9-4-1 Transmission Specification ････････ 9-8 9-4-2 Connection ･･････････････････････ 9-8 9-4-3 Serial Interface Configuration ･･････ 9-8 9-4-4 Modbus RTU Functions ･･･････････ 9-8 9-4-5 Inverter Function Code Access･････ 9-9 9-4-6 Command and Monitor Data Registers ･･････････････････ 9-9 9-4-7 Data Format Specification ････････ 9-11 9-4-8 Communication Errors ･･･････････ 9-15 10. Options ･････････････････････････････ 10-1 10-1 Built-in Options ･･･････････････････ 10-1 10-2 Separately Installed Options ････････ 10-2 11. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ････ 11-1 11-1 General ･････････････････････････ 11-1 11-2 Recommended Installation Instructions ･･････････････････････ 11-2 11-3 The harmonics restriction in Europe Union (EU) ･････････････ 11-5 Appendix App. Inverter Generating Loss ････････････ A-1

Before Using This Product

1-1 Receiving Inspections Unpack and check the product as explained below. If you have any questions about the product, contact the nearest Fuji sales office or your local distributor where you purchased the unit. ① Check the ratings nameplate to confirm that the delivered product is the ordered one. Ratings nameplate

TYPE : Inverter type FRN 030 G11S-4 UX

SOURCE OUTPUT MASS SER.No.

Power supply voltage system :2→ 230V grade、4→460V grade Series name:G11S or P11S Nominal applied motor:030→30HP Product type: FRENIC5000

: Power rating : Output rating : Mass (not indicated for products with 30HP or less) : Serial number

7 5 A 123A0001Z Production lot serial number Production month:1 to 9: January to September, X: October, Y: November, Z: December Production year: Last digit of year (7 --> 2007) ② Check for damaged and/or missing parts upon delivery. ③ In addition to the inverter unit and this manual, the package contains rubber bushing (for products with 30HP or less) and a terminating resistor (1/2 W, 120Ω). The terminating resistors for products with 30HP or less is packed in a sack. The terminating resistors for products with 40HP or more is connected to the control terminal of the inverter unit. This terminating resistor is required for RS-485 communication. The terminating resistor need not be removed regardless of RS-485 communication status.

1-2 Appearance Mounting screws of surface cover

Mounting screws of surface cover (6 screws total) Keypad panel

Lifting holes (4 holes total)

Keypad panel Intermediate cover Surface cover

Surface cover

Ratings nameplate Ratings nameplate 30HP or less

40HP or more

1-1

1-3 Handling the Product (1) Removing the surface cover For the inverter of 30HP or less, loosen the mounting screws of the surface cover, then remove the cover by pulling the top (see Figure 1.3.1).

Fig. 1-3-1 Removing the surface cover (for inverter of 30HP or less)

For the inverter of 40HP or more, remove the six mounting screws of the surface cover, then remove the surface cover.

Fig. 1-3-2 Removing the surface cover (for inverter of 40HP or more)

(2) Removing the keypad panel After removing the surface cover as explained in (1), loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove as shown in Figure 1.3.3.

Fig. 1-3-3 Removing the keypad panel

Loosen the mounting screws of the keypad panel and remove using the finger holds on the keypad panel case.

Fig. 1-3-4 Removing the keypad panel (for inverter of 40HP or more)

1-2

1-4 Carrying Carry the product by the main unit. Do not carry the product while holding the cover or parts other than the main unit. Use a crane or hoist to carry a product equipped with hanging holes. 1-5 Storage Temporary storage Temporary storage of this product must meet those conditions listed in Table 1-5-1. Table 1-5-1 Storage environment Item Ambient temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Atmosphere

Specifications -10℃(14ºF) to +50℃(122ºF) Condensation or freezing must not occur as a result of sudden temperature changes.

-25℃(-13ºF) to +65℃(149ºF) 5 to 95%Note2

Pollution degree 2 Operation/storage: 86 to 106 kPa Air pressure Transport : 70 to 106 kPa Note1: The storage temperature applies only to short periods such as transport. Note2: As a large change in temperature within this humidity range may result in condensation or freezing, do not store where such temperature changes may occur.

① Do not place this product directly on a floor. ② To store the product in an extreme environment, pack in vinyl sheet, etc. ③ If the product is stored in a high-humidity environment, insert a drying agent (e.g., silica gel) and pack the product in vinyl sheet.

Long-term storage If the product is to be stored for an extended period after purchase, the method of storage depends primarily on storage location. The general long-term storage method is as follows: ① The above conditions for temporary storage must be satisfied. When the storage period exceeds three months, the upper limit of ambient temperature must be reduced to 30℃(86ºF) to prevent the deterioration of the electrolytic capacitors. ② Pack the product thoroughly to eliminate exposure to moisture and include a drying agent to ensure a relative humidity of about 70% or less. ③ If the product is mounted on a unit or control panel and is left unused and exposed to the elements like moisture or dust (particularly on a construction site), remove the product and store in a suitable environment. ④ Electrolytic capacitors not provided with power for an extended period will deteriorate. Do not store electrolytic capacitors for one year or longer without providing power.

1-3

2. Installation and Connection 2-1

Operating Environment

Install this product in a location that meets those conditions listed in Table 2-1-1 Table 2-1-2 Output current reduction rate based on altitude

Table 2-1-1 Operating environment Item Location Ambient temperature Relative humidity Atmosphere Air pressure Vibration

Specifications Indoor -10℃(14ºF) to +50℃(122ºF)(For products of 30HP or less, the ventilating covers must be removed if ambient temperature exceeds +40℃(104ºF)) 5 to 95% (No condensation) Pollution degree 2 86 to 106 kPa 2 3mm:from 2 to less than 9 Hz, 1m/s :from 9 to less than 20 Hz, 1m/s2:from 20 to less than 55 2 Hz, 1m/s :from 55 to less than 200 Hz

Altitude 3300ft (1000m) or lower 3300-4950ft (1000 to 1500m) 4950-6600ft (1500 to 2000m) 6600-8250ft (2000 to 2500m) 8250-9900ft (2500 to 3000m)

Output current reduction rate 1.00 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.88

3.9inch(100mm)

Right

2-2

30HP or less: Gap X can be 0. (side-by-side installation) 40HP or more: Gap X >= 2inch (50mm)

Installation Method

① Securely fasten the product in an upright position on a solid structure such that FRENIC5000G11S is facing the front. 3.9inch(100mm) Do not turn the product upside down or install in a horizontal position. Fig.2-2-1 ② As heat is generated during inverter operation, the spaces shown in Fig. 2-2-1 are required to ensure sufficient cooling. As heat radiates upward, do not install the product beneath a device sensitive to heat. ③ As the heat sink may reach a temperature of 90℃(194ºF) during inverter operation, ensure that the material surrounding the product can withstand this temperature. ！

WARNING

Install this product on nonflammable material such as metal.

④ When installing this product in a control panel, consider ventilation to prevent ambient temperature of the inverter from exceeding the specified value. Do not install the product in an area from which heat cannot be sufficiently released. ⑤ If two or more inverters must be installed in the same device or control panel, arrange the units horizontally to minimize the effect of heat. If two or more inverters must be installed vertically, place an insulated plate between the inverters to minimize the effect of heat. ⑥ When shipped from the factory, inverters are internal cooling type inside panel. An inverter of 30HP or less can be converted to an external cooling type simply by adding an optional mounting adapter. An inverter of 40HP or more can be converted simply by moving mounting adapter. Fig.2-2-2 In an external cooling system, a heat sink radiating about 70% of total inverter heat (total loss) can be placed outside the device or control panel. Ensure that heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter (lint, Fig. 2-2-2 External cooling system moist dust particles etc.).

！

WARNING

･In case of external cooling system, cover the inverter rear side in order not to touch the main capacitor and braking resistor. Electric shock may result. ･Ensure that the inverter and heat sink surfaces are kept free of foreign matter such as lint, paper dust, small chips of wood or metal, and dust. Fire or accident may result.

2-1

An inverter of 40HP or more can be converted to an external cooling type simply by moving upper and lower mounting brackets as shown in Fig. 2-2-3. Remove the M6 bracket screws, move the brackets, then secure the brackets using the M5 case mounting screws. (The bracket screws are no longer required after changing the bracket mounting position.) Quantity of mounting screw Voltage series 230V

460V

Inverter type FRN040G11S-2UX to FRN100G11S-2UX FRN040P11S-2UX to FRN125P11S-2UX FRN125G11S-2UX FRN125P11S-2UX FRN040G11S-4UX to FRN250G11S-4UX FRN040P11S-4UX to FRN300P11S-4UX FRN300G11S-4UX to FRN350G11S-4UX FRN350P11S-4UX to FRN400P11S-4UX

Bracket screws

Case mounting screws

Fig. 2-2-3

⑦ For inverters of 30HP or less, remove the ventilating covers if ambient temperature exceeds +40℃(104ºF)

(1) Removing the ventilating covers One ventilating cover is mounted on top of the inverter and two or three are mounted at the bottom. Remove the surface cover, then remove ventilating covers by popping out the cover inserts as shown in Fig.2-2-4.

Fig. 2-2-4 Removing the ventilating cover

2-2

2-3

Connection

Remove the surface cover before connecting the terminal blocks as follows. 2-3-1 Basic connection ①Always connect power to the L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T main circuit power terminals of the inverter. Connecting power to another terminal will damage the inverter. Check that the power voltage is within the maximum allowable voltage marked on the nameplate, etc. ②Always ground the ground terminal to prevent disasters such as fire or electric shock and to minimize noise. ③Use a reliable crimp terminal for connection between a terminal and a cable. ④After terminating the connection(wiring), confirm the following: a. Confirm that the connection is correct. b. Confirm that all necessary connections have been made. c. Confirm that there is no short-circuit or ground fault between terminals and cables. ⑤Connection modification after power-on The smoothing capacitor in the direct current portion of the main circuit cannot be discharged immediately after the power is turned off. To ensure safety, use a multimeter to check that the voltage of the direct current (DC) is lowered to the safety range (25V DC or less)after the charge lamp goes off. Also, confirm that the voltage is zero before short-circuiting. The residual voltage (electric charge) may causesparks.

！

WARNING

• Always connect a ground wire. Electric shock or fire may result. • Ensure that a licensed specialist performs all wiring works. • Confirm that the power is turned off (open) before commencing wiring operations. Electrical shock may result.

2-3

Basic Connection Diagram (Sink Logic) G11S:15HP and above P11S:20HP and above

G11S:Up to 10HP P11S:Up to 15HP

DB) (CM) (THR)

Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)

RS-485

Fig.2-3-1 Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated (*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage. (*2) Use as required. (*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary. (*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR. (*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5) (*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity. Connect them as shown in the figure above. (*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply. (*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input. (*9) If usingV2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively. (*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer.

2-4

Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Sink Logic) G11S:15HP and above P11S:20HP and above

Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)

RS-485

Fig.2-3-2

2-5

G11S:Up to 10HP P11S:Up to 15HP

Basic Connection Diagram (Source Logic, Typically used in Europe) G11S:15HP and above P11S:20HP and above

G11S:Up to 10HP P11S:Up to 15HP

Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)

RS-485

Fig.2-3-3

Note: The control circuit common terminals [11], (CM) and <CMY> are isolated (*1) Use a drive with rated voltage matching the power supply voltage. (*2) Use as required. (*3) Use this peripheral device when necessary. (*4) Remove the jumper wire (*4) between P1 and P(+) before connecting a DC REACTOR. (*5) Be sure to use the braking unit (option)(*6) when connecting the external braking resistor (option)(*5) (*6) Connect the braking unit to P(+) ans N(-). The auxiliary terminals [1] and [2] have polarity. Connect them as shown in the figure above. (*7) The drive can be operated without connecting the auxiliary control power supply. (*8) Terminal (X1) to (X9) can be set to 9 (THR) - Braking unit thermal trip input. (*9) If usingV2 or C1, as a reference signal, they must be used exclusively. (*10) It is possible to input voltage signals (0 to +10 VDC or 0 to +5 VDC) to terminals [12] [11] instead of the potentiometer

2-6

Basic Connection Diagram to PLC (Source logic, Typically used in Europe) G11S:15HP and above P11S:20HP and above

G11S:Up to 10HP P11S:Up to 15HP

(THR) (P24)

Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI)

RS-485

Fig.2-3-4

2-7

2-3-2

Connecting the main circuit and ground terminals

Table 2-3-1 Functions of main circuit terminals and ground terminals Symbol Terminal name Description L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main circuit power terminal Connects a 3-phase power supply. U, V, W Inverter output terminal Connects a 3-phase motor. Connects a backup AC power supply to the Auxiliary control-power R0, T0 control circuit. (Not supported for inverter of 1HP input terminal or less) DC reactor connecting Connects the optional power-factor correcting DC P1, P (+) terminal reactor. External braking resistor Connects the optional external braking resistor. P (+), DB connecting terminal (For inverter of 10HP or less) Supplies DC link circuit voltage to the external P (+), N (-) DC link circuit terminal braking unit (option) or power regeneration unit (option). G Inverter ground terminal Grounds the inverter chassis (case) to the earth.

(1)

Main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)

① Connect these terminals to the power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker or a ground-fault circuit interrupter for circuit (wiring) protection. Phase-sequence matching is unnecessary. ② To ensure safety, a magnetic contactor should be connected to disconnect the inverter from the power supply when the inverter protective function activates. ③ Use control circuit terminal FWD/REV or the RUN/STOP key on the keypad panel to start or stop the inverter. The main circuit power should be used to start or stop the inverter only if absolutely necessary and then should not be used more than once every hour. ④ If you need to connect these terminals to a single-phase power supply, please contact the factory.

(2)

Inverter output terminals (U, V, W)

① Connect these terminals to a 3-phase motor in the correct phase sequence. If the direction of motor rotation is incorrect, exchange any two of the U, V, and W phases. ② Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter output. ③ If the cable from the inverter to the motor is very long, a high-frequency current may be generated by stray capacitance between the cables and result in an overcurrent trip of the inverter, an increase in leakage current, or a reduction in current indication precision. When a motor is driven by a PWM-type drive, the motor terminals may be subject to surge voltage generated by drive element switching. If the motor cable (with 460V series motors, in particular) is particularly long, surge voltage will deteriorate motor insulation. To prevent this, use the following guidelines: Inverters 7.5 HP and larger Motor Insulation Level 460 VAC Input Voltage 230 VAC Input Voltage

1000V 66 ft (20 m) 1312 ft (400 m) *

1300V 328 ft (100 m) 1312 ft (400 m) *

1600V 1312 ft (400 m) * 1312 ft (400 m) *

Inverters 5 HP and smaller Motor Insulation Level 1000V 1300V 1600V 460 VAC Input Voltage 66 ft (20 m) 165 ft (50 m) * 165 ft (50 m) * 230 VAC Input Voltage 328 ft (100 m) * 328 ft (100 m) * 328 ft (100 m) * * For this case the cable length is determined by secondary effects and not voltage spiking. Note: When a motor protective thermal O/L relay is inserted between the inverter and the motor, the thermal O/L relay may malfunction (particularly in the 460V series), even when the cable length is 165 feet (50m) or less. To correct, insert a filter or reduce the carrier frequency. (Use function code “F26 Motor sound”.)

2-8

(3) Auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0) The inverter operates even if power is not provided to these terminals. If a protective circuit operates and the magnetic contactor on the inverter power side is opened (off), the inverter control circuit power, the alarm output (30A, B, and C), and the keypad panel display goes off. To prevent this, the same AC power as the main circuit AC power must be supplied (as auxiliary control power) to the auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0). ① To ensure effective noise reduction when using a radio noise filter, the output power from the filter must go to the auxiliary control-power input terminals.

P(+)

Inverter Magnetic contactor

Noise filter Power supply

RCD

L1/R + L2/S

L3/T

Insulation Transformer R0

DC/DC

Inverter control power

Fig. 2-3-5 Connecting the auxiliary control-power input terminals

If these terminals are connected to the input side of the filter, the noise reduction effect deteriorates. ② When the RCD (Residual-current Protective Device) is installed (G11S:30HP or less), the terminal R0 and T0 should be connected to the OUTPUT side of the RCD. If they are connected to the input side of the RCD, RCD will be malfunction because the power supply of the inverter is three phase and the terminal R0 and T0 is single phase. When the terminal R0 and T0 are connected to the INPUT side of the RCD, the insulation transformer is required to install as shown on the Fig. 2-3-5.

(4) DC reactor connecting terminals (P1 and P (+)) ① Before connecting a power-factor correcting DC reactor (optional) to these terminals, remove the factory-installed jumper. ② If a DC reactor is not used, do not remove the jumper. Note:For inverter of 100HP or more, the DC reactor is provided as a separate standard component and should always be connected to the terminals.

Fig. 2-3-6

(5) External braking-resistor connecting terminals (P (+) and DB) (G11S:10HP or less) For the G11S of 10HP or less, a built-in braking resistor is connected to terminals P (+) and DB. If this braking resistor does not provide sufficient thermal capacity (e.g., in highly repetitive operation or heavy inertia load operation), an external braking resistor (option) must be mounted to improve braking performance. ① Remove the built-in braking resistor from terminals P(+) DC reactor External braking resistor (DB) (DCR) and DB. Insulate the resistor-removed terminals with adhesive insulation tape, etc. 2 (THR) ② Connect terminals P(+) and DB of the external braking P DB (P24) 1 resistor to terminals P(+) and DB of the inverter. ③ The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not [x x] exceed 16ft (5m). P1

(6) DC link circuit terminals (P (+) and N (-))

P(+)

N(-)

DBR The G11S inverter of 15HP or more does not contain a drive circuit for the braking resistor. To improve braking Fig. 2-3-7 Connection (G11S:10HP or less) performance, an external braking unit (option) and an external braking resistor (option) must be installed. ① Connect terminals P(+) and N(-) of the braking unit External braking resistor (DB) to terminals P(+) and N(-) of the inverter. The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not 2 (THR) exceed 16ft(5m). 1 ② Connect terminals P(+) and DB of the braking DB P DC reactor resistor to terminals P(+) and DB of the braking unit. (DCR) The wiring (cables twisted or otherwise) should not P DB 2 exceed 33ft (10m). When terminals P (+) and N (-) P (P24) N of the inverter are not used, leave terminals open. 1 Braking unit (BU) If P (+) is connected to N (-) or the braking resistor is connected directly, the resistor will break. P1 P(+) N(-) ③ Auxiliary contacts 1 and 2 of the braking unit have polarity. To connect the power regeneration unit, refer to the "Power Regeneration Unit Instruction Manual".

Fig. 2-3-8 Connection (G11S:15HP or more)

2-9

(7) Inverter ground terminal To ensure safety and noise reduction, always ground the inverter ground terminal. Also, metal frames of electrical equipment must be grounded as specified in the Electric Facility Technical Standard. The connection procedure is as follows: ① Ground metal frames to a ground terminal (Ground resistance:10Ω or less). ② Use a suitable cable (short and thick) to connect the inverter system to the ground terminal.

(8) Auxiliary power switching connector (CN UX) (for inverter of 40HP or more) When an inverter of 40HP or more requires a main circuit power voltage as listed in Table 2-3-2, disconnect auxiliary power switching connector CN UX from U1 and connect to U2. For the switching method, see Fig. 2-3-11. Table 2-3-2 Main circuit power voltage requiring auxiliary power switching connector switching

！

Frequency [Hz]

Power voltage range [VAC]

380-398

380-430

CAUTION

• Check that the number of phases and rated voltage of this product match those of the AC power supply. • Do not connect the AC power supply to the output terminals (U, V, W). Injury may result. • Do not connect a braking resistor directly to the DC terminals (P[+] and N[-]). Fire may result.

(9) Fan power switching connector (CN RXTX) (for inverter of 40HP or more) G11S without options supports DC power input via DC common connection by connecting the power regeneration converter (RHC series) as shown in Fig. 2-3-10. For details, refer to technical documentation. The inverter of 40HP or more contains an AC-powered component (e.g., AC cooling fan). To use the inverter using DC power input, switch the fan power switching connector (CN RTXT) inside the inverter to the R0-T0 side and provide AC power to the R0 and T0 terminals. (See Fig. 2-3-9.) For the switching method, see Fig. 2-3-11. Note: In the standard state, the fan power switching connector (CN RXTX) is connected to the L1/R-L3/T side. When DC power input is not used, do not switch this connector. The same AC voltage as the main circuit power voltage must be supplied to the auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0). If not supplied, the fan does not rotate and the inverter will overheat (0H1).

2-10

Jumper (not(not supplied 100HP or more) Jumper suppliedfor forinverter inverter of of 75kW or more)

30kW or more more 40HP or MCCB

Noise filter

Inverter

P(+)

N(-)

Magnetic contactor

L1/R U +

L2/S

V W

L3/T

Power supply CN RX TX

Fan CN RX TX

T0 R0

When switched to DC power input mode

Fig. 2-3-9 Fan power switching PWM converter

40HP or or more 30kW more Power supply

P(+)

+ C

S T

N(-)

Inverter

N(-)

P(+)

L1/R +

L2/S

V W

L3/T

CN RX TX

Fan Switch CNRXTX to the R0-T0 side.

R0 T0

Fig. 2-3-10A

Example of connection by combination with power regeneration converter(40HP or more)

Note: To connect the power regeneration converter to an inverter of 30HP or less, do not connect the power supply directly to the auxiliary control-power input terminals (R0 and T0) of the inverter. However, if such a connection is required, insulate these input terminals from the main power of the power regeneration converter with an insulation transformer. The connection example of a power regeneration unit is provided in the "Power Regeneration Unit Instruction Manual".

Noise filter MCCB or RCD

RHC series

Magnetic contactor

L1/R

FRN-G11S L1/R U

Power supply

L2/S

W L3/T

L3/T

Insulation Transformer

Fig. 2-3-10B Example of connection by combination with power regeneration converter (30HP or less)

2-11

The switching connectors are mounted on the power PCB above the control PCB as shown on the right.

Note: To remove a connector, unlock the connector (using the locking mechanism) and pull. To mount a connector, push the connector until it click locks.

FRN040G11S-4UX to FRN150G11S-4UX

FRN200G11S-4UX to FRN350G11S-4UX <Enlarged view of part A>

When shipped from the factory, CN UX is connected to the U1 side and CN RXTX is connected to the L1/R-L3/T side.

Factory shipment status Connector removal After connector switching.

CNUX : U1 CNRXTX : L1/R-L3/T

In this figure the power voltage is 380 to 398V AC, 50Hz (or 380 to 430V AC, 60Hz) and the inverter is used in DC power input mode.

Fig. 2-3-11 Power switching connectors (only for 40HP or more)

2-12

2-3-3

Connecting the control terminals

Table 2-3-3 lists the functions of the control circuit terminals. A control circuit terminal should be connected according to the setting of its functions. Table 2-3-3 Classification

Terminal symbol 13

Terminal name

Potentiometer power supply Voltage input

Voltage input

Current input

11 FWD

X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9

Analog input common Forward operation/stop command Reverse operation/stop command Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Digital input 3 Digital input 4 Digital input 5 Digital input 6 Digital input 7 Digital input 8 Digital input 9

CM P24 PLC

Common terminal Control Unit power Supply PLC signal power

FMA (11: Common terminal)

Analog monitor

Analog input

REV

Digital input

Analog output

Function Used for +10V DC power supply for frequency setting POT (variable resistor of 1 to 5kΩ) ① Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage supplied from an external circuit. - 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100% - Reversible operation using positive and negative signals:0 to +/10V DC/0 to 100% - Reverse operation: +10 to 0V DC/0 to 100% ② The feedback signal for PID control is input. ③ The analog input value from the external circuit is used for torque control. (P11S does not support this function.) * Input resistance: 22kΩ Frequency is set according to the analog input voltage supplied from an external circuit - 0 to +10V DC/0 to 100% - Reverse operation:+10 to 0V DC/0 to 100% * It can be used only one terminal "V2" or "C1" alternatively * Input resistance:22kΩ ① Frequency is set according to the analog input current supplied from an external circuit. - 4 to 20mA DC/0 to 100% - Reverse operation:20 to 4mA DC/0 to 100% ② The feedback signal for PID control is input. ③ PTC thermistor input * It can be used only one terminal "V2" or "C1" alternatively. * Input resistance:250Ω Common terminal for analog input signals Used for forward operation (when FWD-CM is on) or deceleration and stop (when FWD-CM is off) Used for reverse operation (when REV-CM is on) or deceleration and stop (when REV-CM is off) The coast-to-stop command, external alarm, alarm reset, multistep frequency selection, and other functions (from an external circuit) can be assigned to terminals X1 to X9. For details, see "Setting the Terminal Functions E01 to E09" in Section 5.2, "Details of Each Function." <Specifications of digital input circuit> * Item min. typ. max. Operating voltage ON level 2V 2V OFF level 22V 24V 27V Operating current at ON level 3.2mA 4.5mA Allowable leakage current at OFF level 0.5mA

Common terminal for Digital input and FMP terminals +24VDC power supply for control input. Maximum output current 100mA Used to connect power supply for PLC output signals (rated voltage 24(22 to 27) V DC) at source logic operation. Outputs monitor signal using analog DC voltage 0 to +10V DC. The meaning of this signal is one of the following: -Output frequency (before slip compensation) -Power consumption -Output frequency (after slip compensation) -PID feedback value -Output current -PG feedback value -Output voltage -DC link circuit voltage -Output torque -Universal AO -Load factor *Connectable impedance:5kΩ minimum

2-13

Pulse output

FMP (CM: Common terminal)

Frequency monitor (pulse waveform output)

Transistor output1

Y2 Y3 Y4

Transistor output2 Transistor output3 Transistor output4

CME 30A,30B, 30C

Communication

A running signal, frequency equivalence signal, overload early warning signal, and other signals from the inverter are output (as transistor output) to arbitrary ports, For details, see "Setting the Terminal Functions E20 to E23" in Section 5.2, "Details of Each Function." <Specifications of transistor output circuit> * Item Operating ON level voltage OFF level Maximum load current at ON level Leakage current at OFF level

Transistor output

Relay output

Outputs a monitor signal using the pulse waveform. This signal has the same function as the FMA signal.

Transistor output common Alarm output for any fault

Y5A,Y5C

Multipurpose-signal relay output

DX+, DX-

RS-485 communication input-output Communication-cable shield connection terminal

min. -

typ. 2V 24V -

max. 3V 27V 50mA 0.1mA

Common terminal for transistor output signals This terminal is insulated from terminals [CM] and [11]. If the inverter is stopped by an alarm (protective function), the alarm signal is output from the relay contact output terminal (1SPDT). Contact rating: 48V DC, 0.5A An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal operation) can be selected. These signals can be output similar to the Y1 to Y4 signals above. The contact rating for any fault is the same as that of the alarm output above. An excitation mode (excitation at alarm occurrence or at normal operation) can be selected. Input-output signal terminals for RS-485 communication. UP to 31 inverters can be connected using the daisy chain method. Terminal for connecting the shield of a cable. The terminal is electrically floating.

(1)Analog input terminals (13,12,V2,C1,and 11) ①These terminals receive weak analog signals that may be affected by external noise. The cables must be as short as possible (66ft (20m) or less), must be shielded, and must be grounded in principle. If the cables are affected by external induction noise, the shielding effect may be improved by connecting the shield to terminal [11]. ② If contacts must be connected to these circuits, twin (bifurcated type) contacts for handling weak signals must be used. A contact must not be connected to terminal [11].

0k to 5 kΩ

Fig. 2-3-12

③If an external analog signal output device is connected to these terminals, it may malfunction as a result of inverter noise. To prevent malfunction, connect a ferrite core or capacitor to the external analog signal output device. Fig. 2-3-13 Example of noise prevention

2-14

(2) Digital input terminals (FWD, REV, X1 to X9 and CM) ① Digital input terminals (e.g., FWD, REV, X1 to X9) are generally turned on or off by connecting or disconnecting the line to or from the CM terminal. If Digital input terminals are turned on or off by switching the open collector output of PLC using an external power supply, a resulting bypass circuit may cause the inverter to malfunction. To prevent a malfunction, connect the PLC terminal as shown in Fig. 2-3-14. ② When using a contact input, a relay having highly reliable contact must be used. Example: Fuji Electric Control Relay:HH54PW

Programmable Logic controller

Fig. 2-3-14 Connection for External power supply

(3) Transistor output terminals (Y1 to Y4, CME) ① To connect a control relay, connect a surge absorbing diode to both ends of its exciting coil.

(4) Others ① To prevent a malfunction as a result of noise, control terminal cables must be placed as far as possible from the main circuit cables. ② The control cables inside the inverter must be secured to prevent direct contact with live section (e.g., main-circuit terminal block) of the main circuit.

！

WARNING

！

CAUTION

Control lines generally do not have enhanced insulation. If the insulation of a control line is damaged, the control signals may be exposed to high voltage in the main circuit. The Low Voltage Directive in Europe also restricts the exposure to high voltage. Electric shock may result The inverter, motor, and cables generate noise. Check that the ambient sensors and devices do not malfunction. Accident may result.

(5) Wiring of control circuit (inverter of 40HP or more) ① Pull out the control circuit wiring along the left panel as shown in Fig. 2-3-15. ② Secure the cable to cable binding hole A (on the left wall of the main circuit terminal block) using a cable-tie (e.g., insulock). The cable-tie must not exceed 0.14inch (3.5mm) in width and 0.06inch (1.5mm) in thickness. ③ When the optional PC board is mounted, the signal lines must be secured to cable binding hole B.

Fig. 2-3-16 The securing positions of the control-circuit line of inverter (40HP or more)

Fig. 2-3-15 The wiring route of the control circuit

2-15

2-3-4 Terminal arrangement (1) Main circuit terminals FRNF25 to 001G11S-2UX FRNF50 to 001G11S-4UX

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB

FRN100G11S-2UX /FRN125P11S-2UX Screw size M4 R0 T0

Screw size M3.5

P1 P(+) N(-)

L1/R L2/S L3/T P1 P(+) N(-)

G G

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB

P1 P(+) N(-)

L1/R

L2/S

L3/T

Max. lug width 0.40inch (10.1mm) FRN007 to 010G11S-2UX /FRN007 to 015P11S-2UX FRN007 to 010G11S-4UX /FRN007 to 015P11S-4UX

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB

P1 P(+) N(-)

L1/R L1/R

Screw size M5 Max. lug width 0.53inch (13.5mm)

G G

Screw size M4

L2/S

L3/T

L2/S

P(+)

N(-)

W W

P1 P(+)

L1/R L2/S L3/T L1/R L2/S L3/T

P1 P(+) N(-) P1

P(+) N(-)

U U G

W W G

N(-)

FRN500, 600 G11S-4UX/FRN700, 800 P11S-4UX

Screw size M8 Max. lug width 1.18inch (30mm) FRN050 to 075G11S-2UX /FRN060 to 100P11S-2UX FRN100 to 150G11S-4UX /FRN125 to 200P11S-4UX Screw size M4 R0 T0 U V W G

Max. lug width 1.26inch (32mm)

FRN040G11S-2UX /FRN040 to 050P11S-2UX FRN040 to 075G11S-4UX /FRN040 to 100P11S-4UX Screw size M4 R0 T0 U V W

L1/R L2/S L3/T

N(-)

Screw size G = M10 Other terminals = M12

Max. lug width 0.72inch (18.25mm)

P1 P1

L3/T

Screw size M6

L1/R L2/S L3/T

P(+)

FRN015 to 030G11S-2UX /FRN020 to 030P11S-2UX FRN015 to 030G11S-4UX /FRN020 to 030P11S-4UX R0 T0 Screw size M3.5 P1 P(+) N(-)

Screw size G : M10 other terminals : M12

L1/R L2/S L3/T DB

Max. lug width 1.26inch (32mm) FRN400, 450 G11S-4UX/FRN500, 600 P11S-4UX

Screw size M3.5 U

U P1

Screw size M4

R0 T0

Max. lug width 1.38inch (35mm) FRN125G11S-2UX /FRN150P11S-2UX FRN200 to 350G11S-4UX /FRN250 to 450P11S-4UX Screw size M4 R0 T0

Screw size G: M10 other terminals : M12

Screw size M3.5

Max. lug width 0.29inch (7.4mm) FRN002 to 005G11S-2UX Screw size M3.5 FRN002 to 005G11S-4UX R0 T0

N(-)

Screw size G : M8 other terminals : M10

Max. lug width 1.38inch (35mm)

2-16

Screw size R0, T0 = M4 G = M10 Other terminals = M12

Max. lug width 1.26inch (32mm)

(2) Control circuit terminals

30C 30A 30B Y5A Y5C CMY Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 11 C1 12 FMA 13 FMP V2 PLC CM X1 CM X2 FWD X3 REV X4 P24 X5 P24 DX â&#x2C6;&#x2019; DX +

X6 X7 X8

SD X9

2-17

2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit Inverter type Voltage G11S/P11S FRNF25G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-2UX FRN001G11S-2UX FRN002G11S-2UX FRN003G11S-2UX FRN005G11S-2UX FRN007G11S-2UX FRN007,010P11S-2UX FRN010G11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX FRN015G11S-2UX FRN020P11S-2UX FRN020G11S-2UX 3-phase FRN025P11S-2UX 230V FRN025G11S-2UX FRN030P11S-2UX FRN030G11S-2UX FRN040G11S/P11S-2UX FRN050P11S-2UX FRN050G11S-2UX FRN060G11S/P11S-2UX FRN075G11S/P11S-2UX FRN100P11S-2UX FRN100G11S-2UX FRN125P11S-2UX FRN125G11S -2UX FRN150P11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-4UX FRN001G11S-4UX FRN002G11S-4UX FRN003G11S-4UX FRN005G11S-4UX FRN007G11S-4UX FRN007, 010P11S-4UX FRN010G11S-4UX FRN015P11S-4UX FRN015G11S-4UX FRN020P11S-4UX FRN020G11S-4UX FRN025P11S-4UX FRN025G11S-4UX FRN030P11S-4UX FRN030G11S-4UX FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX 3-phase FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX 460V FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX FRN100P11S-4UX FRN100G11S-4UX FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX FRN200P11S-4UX FRN200G11S-4UX FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX FRN300P11S-4UX FRN300G11S-4UX FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX FRN450P11S-4UX FRN450G11S-4UX FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX FRN700P11S-4UX FRN800P11S-4UX

MCCB or 2 RCD/GFCI Wire range [AWG] (mm ) Required torque [lb-inch](N.m) Rated current(A) W/ W/o Main Auxiliary Auxiliary Control L1/R,L2/S,L3/T DCR DCR terminal control-power U,V,W control-power Control

5 5 10.6(1.2) 5 5 5 10 10 15 15.9(1.8) 10 20 20 30 30 50 30,40 50,75 31.0(3.5) 40 75 50 100 50 100 75 125 75 125 100 150 51.3(5.8) 100 150 100 175 100 175 150 200 119(13.5) 175 250 200 250

300 350

350

400

200 250

300

350

500

500 600 700 700 800 1,000 1,000 1,200

16 (1.3)

14 (2.1) 10 (5.3) 8 (8.4) 6 (13.3) 4 (21.2) 6.2(0.7) 10.6(1.2)

3 (26.7) 2 (33.6)

24 (0.2) 16(1.3)

1 (42.4) 1/0 (53.5) 3/0 (85.0) 4/0 (107.2) 1/0X2 (53.5X2) 350(177) 2/0X2 (67.4X2) 500(253) 300X2 (152X2)

239(27)

425(48)

500 5 5 10.6(1.2) 5 5 5 10 15.9(1.8) 5 15 10 20 15 30 15,20 30,40 31.0(3.5) 20 40 30 50 30 50 40 60 40 60 51.3(5.8) 40 75 40 75 50 100 50 100 75 125 100 125 100 150 119(13.5) 125 200 175

16 (1.3) 14 (2.1) 12 (3.3)

10 (5.3)

8 (8.4) 6 (13.3) 4 (21.2) 6.2(0.7) 10.6(1.2)

3 (26.7) 2 (33.6)

24 (0.2) 16(1.3)

1/0 (53.5) 2/0 (67.4) 4/0 (107.2) 1X2 (42.4X2) 250 (127) 350(177)

239(27)

600(304) 300X2(152X2)

425(48)

350X2(177X2) 500X2(253X2) 600X2(304X2) 500X3(253X3) 600X3(304X3)

Note:The type of wire is 70℃(149ºF) 600V Grade heat-resistant polyvinyl chloride insulated wires (PVC). The above-mentioned wire size are the recommended size under the condition of the ambient temperature 50℃(122ºF) or lower.

2-18

CAUTION on Magnetic contactor selection (without DCR) [without DCR] The magnetic contactor should be selected from "Magnetic contactor models" shown in table 2-3-4 to prevent the welding the magnetic contactor when using the auxiliary power input (R0, T0) and the time between the magnetic contactor of the main circuit (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) is OFF and re-turning on is "T off main circuit re-turning on time" or the less shown in table 2-3-4. [with DCR or other conditions] When the inverter which is NOT described in the table 2-3-4 or using with DCR (power-factor correcting DC reactor), the magnetic contactor is selected from "2-3-5 Applicable equipment and wire size for main circuit" in chapter 2. Table 2-3-4 Re-turning on time and recommended magnetic contactor models *1 T off *2 Re-turning on time [s] Magnetic contactor Voltage G11S P11S models (the time from power OFF to (without DCR) re-turning on) FRN002G11S-2UX 54 SC-N1 FRN003G11S-2UX 76 3-Phase FRN005G11S-2UX 108 SC-N2 230V series FRN007G11S-2UX FRN007P11S-2UX 77 SC-N2S FRN010G11S-2UX FRN010P11S-2UX 112 FRN015G11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX 77 SC-N3 3-Phase FRN002G11S-4UX 27 SC-5-1 460V series FRN003G11S-4UX 38 SC-N1 FRN005G11S-4UX 54 FRN007G11S-4UX FRN007P11S-4UX 43 SC-N2 FRN010G11S-4UX FRN010P11S-4UX 57 FRN015G11S-4UX FRN015P11S-4UX 77 SC-N2S FRN020G11S-4UX FRN020P11S-4UX 112 FRN025G11S-4UX FRN025P11S-4UX 134 FRN030G11S-4UX FRN030P11S-4UX 154 SC-N3 *2 Magnetic contactor

without DCR

L1/R

Power supply

P(+)

L2/S L3/T R0 T0

Inverter Auxiliary power input

Magnetic contactor

supplied

OFF *1 T off

2-19

Operation

3-1 Inspection and Preparation before Operation Check the following before operation: ① Check that the connection is correct. In particular, check that the power supply is not connected to any of the U, V, and W output terminals and that the ground terminal is securely grounded. ② Check for short-circuits and ground faults between the terminals and live sections. ③ Check for loose terminals, connectors, or screws. ④ Check that the motor is separated from mechanical equipment. ⑤ Turn off switches before turning power to ensure that the inverter will not start or operate abnormally at power-on. ⑥ Check the following after power-on: a. Check that no alarm message is displayed on the keypad panel (see Figure 3-1-2). b. Check that the fan inside the inverter is rotating. (For inverters with 2HP or more)

！

WARNING

Fig. 3-1-1 Inverter connection

Be sure to put on the surface cover before turning on the power (close). Never remove the cover while the power is applied to the inverter. To ensure safety, do not operate switches with wet hands. Electric shock may result Fig. 3-1-2 Display on keypad panel at power-on

3-2 Operation Method There are various methods of operation. Select a method of operation according to operating purpose and specifications by referring to Section 4-2, "Operating the Keypad Panel," and Chapter 5, "Explanation of Functions." Table 3-2-1 lists general operation methods

3-3 Trial Run Upon confirming that inspection results are normal (see Section 3-1), proceed with a trial run. The initial operation mode (set at factory) is using the keypad panel. ① Turn power on and confirm that frequency Table 3-2-1 General operation methods Operation Operation display 0.00Hz is blinking on the LED monitor. Frequency setting command command ② Set the frequency to about 5Hz using ∧ key. Keys on keypad panel Operation FWD REV ③ To start the run, press FWD key (for forward using keypad STOP ∧ ∨ rotation) or REV key (for reverse rotation). To panel stop, press STOP key. Contact input Operation ∧ ∨ ④ Check the following items : (switch) using a. Is the rotating direction correct? external Freq. Setting POT (VR), Terminals FWD-CM and signal b. Is the rotation smooth? (no buzzing or analog voltage, REV-CM terminals analog current abnormal vibration) c. Is acceleration and deceleration smooth? If no abnormality is detected, increase the frequency and check the above items again. If the results of the trial run are normal, start a formal run. Notes: - If an error is detected in the inverter or motor, immediately stop the operation and attempt to determine the cause of error referring to Chapter 7, "Troubleshooting." - As voltage is still applied to the main circuit terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and auxiliary control-power terminals (R0, T0) even when the output from the inverter is terminated, do not touch the terminals. The smoothing capacitor in the inverter is being charged after the power is turned off and it is not discharged immediately. Before touching an electric circuit, confirm that the charge lamp is off or a multimeter is indicating a low voltage at the terminals.

3-1

4. Keypad Panel The keypad panel has various functions for specifying operations such as keypad operation (frequency setting, run/stop command), confirming and changing function data, confirming status, and copying. Review the use of each function before commencing running. The keypad panel can also be removed or inserted during running. However, if the keypad panel is removed during a keypad panel operation (e.g., run/stop, frequency setting), the inverter stops and outputs an alarm.

4-1

Appearance of Keypad Panel

LED monitor: Four-digit 7-segment display Used to display various items of monitored data such as setting frequency, output frequency and alarm code. Auxiliary information indication for LED monitor: Selected units or multiple of the monitored data (on the LED monitor) are displayed on the top line of the LCD monitor. The symbol indicates selected units or multiple number. The symbol ▲ indicates there is an upper screen not currently displayed. LCD monitor: Used to display such various items of information as operation status and function data. An operation guide message, which can be scrolled, is displayed at the bottom of the LCD monitor. This LCD monitor has a backlight feature which turns on when the control power is applied or any keypad key is pressed, and stays on approximately 5 minutes after the last key stroke. Indication on LCD monitor: Displays one of the following operation status: FWD: Forward operation REV: Reverse operation STOP: Stop Control keys (valid during keypad panel operation): Displays the selected operation mode: Used for inverter run and stop REM: Terminal block LOC: Keypad panel FED COMM: Communication terminal : Forward operation command JOG: Jogging mode REV : Reverse operation command The symbol ▼ indicates there is a lower screen not STOP : Stop command currently displayed. Operation keys: RUN LED : Used for screen switching, data change, Indicates that an operation command was input by frequency setting, etc. pressing the FWD or REV key. Table 4-1-1 Operation key PRG

FUNC DATA ∧

∨

SHIFT

RESET

STOP

∧

RESET

Functions of operation keys

Main function Used to switch the current screen to the menu screen or switch to the initial screen in the operation/trip mode. Used to switch the LED monitor or to determine the entered frequency, function code, or data. Used to change data, move the cursor up or down, or scroll the screen Used to move the cursor horizontally at data change. When this key is pressed with the up or down key, the cursor moves to the next function block. Used to cancel current input data and switch the displayed screen. If an alarm occurs, this key is used to reset the trip status (valid only when the alarm mode initial screen is displayed). Used to switch normal operation mode to jogging operation mode or vice versa. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD monitor. Switches operation mode (from keypad panel operation mode to terminal block operation mode or reverse). When these keys are operated, function F01 data is also switched from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0. The selected mode is displayed on the LCD indicator.

4-1

4-2 Keypad Panel Operation System (LCD screen, Level Structure) 4-2-1

Normal operation

The keypad panel operation system (screen transition, level structure) is structured as follows: 60.00

60.00

PRG

Operation mode

Program menu

RESET

FUNC DATA

RESET

60.00

Screen for each function

FUNC DATA

60.00 Supplementary screen

RESET

PRG

4-2-2

Alarm occurrence

If an alarm is activated, operation is changed from normal keypad panel operation to an alarm mode operation. The alarm mode screen appears and alarm information is displayed. The program menu, function screens, and supplementary screens remain unchanged as during normal operation, though the switching method from program menu to alarm mode is limited to PRG . 60.00

Keypad panel operating system during normal operation

Operation mode

Alarm is activated Alarm reset processing (including

Alarm

PRG

Alarm mode

Alarm Program menu

RESET

)

FUNC DATA

RESET

Alarm

Screen for each function

PRG

4-2

Alarm

FUNC DATA

Supplementary screen

RESET

Table 4-2-1

Overview of contents displayed for each level Content This screen is for normal operation. Frequency setting by keypad panel and the LED monitor switching are possible only when this screen is displayed. Each function of the keypad panel is displayed in menu form and can be selected. FUNC Selecting the desired function from the list and pressing DATA displays the screen of the selected function. The following functions are available as keypad panel functions (menus). No. Menu Outline name DATA SET 1 The code and name of the function are displayed. Selecting a function displays a data setting screen for checking, or modifying data. DATA CHECK 2 The code and name of the function are displayed. Select a function to display a screen for checking data. Modifying data is possible as described above by going to the data setting screen. OPR MNTR 3 Can check various data on the operating status. I/O CHECK 4 Can check the status of analog and digital input/output for the inverter and options as an I/O checker. MAINTENANC 5 Can check inverter status, life expectancy , communication error status, and ROM version information as maintenance information. LOAD FCTR 6 Can measure maximum and average current and average breaking force in load rate measurement. ALM INF 7 Can check the operating status and input/output status at the latest alarm occurrence. ALM CAUSE 8 Can check the latest alarm or simultaneously occurred alarms and alarm history. Selecting the alarm and pressing FUNC DATA , displays the contents of alarm as troubleshooting. DATA COPY 9 Places the function of one inverter in memory for copying to another inverter.

No. Level name 1 Operating 2

3 4

mode Program menu

Screen for each function Supplementary screen

The function screen selected on the program menu appears, hence completing the function. Functions not completed (e.g., modifying function data, displaying alarm factors) on individual function screens are displayed on the supplementary screen.

4-3

4-3 Operating Keypad Panel 4-3-1 Operation Mode The screen for normal inverter operation includes a screen for displaying inverter operating status and an operation guide and a screen for graphically displaying the operating status in the form of a bar graph. Switching between both screens is possible using the E45 function. 1) Operation guide (E45=0)

60.00

STOP

RUN

PRG ⇒ PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

Rotating direction (no operation command, blank, yes: FWD/REV)

FWD

Operating status (no operation command, STOP, yes: RUN)

PRG ⇒ PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

2) Bar graph (E45=1)

60.00 Hz A % Fout/Iout/TRQ

Output frequency (maximum frequency at full-scale) Output current (200% of inverter rating at full-scale) Torque calculation value (200% of motor rating at full-scale)

4-3-2 Setting digital frequency On the operation mode screen, press ∧ or ∨ to display the set frequency on the LED. Data is initially incremented and decremented in the smallest possible unit. Holding down ∧ or ∨ increases or decreases the speed of increment or decrement. The digit to change data can be selected FUNC using SHIFT >> and then data can be set directly. To save the frequency settings, press DATA . Press RESET and PRG to return to the operation mode. If keypad panel settings are not selected, the present frequency setting mode appears on the LCD. When selecting the PID function, PID command can be set with a process value. (Refer to technical documentation for details). 1) Digital (keypad panel) settings (F01=0 or C30=0)

60.00

RUN

60.00 ∧

∨

PRG ⇒ PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

<DIG.SET Hz> LOCAL 50 − 400 F/D⇒DATA SET

56.89 ∧

Frequency setting value

<DIG.SET Hz> LOCAL 50 − 400 F/D⇒DATA SET

Screen explanation

STORING...

When

∨

Present frequency setting mode Frequency setting range Operations guide

2) Other than digital setting

60.00

RUN PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

60.00 ∧

∨

Frequency setting value

<REMOTE REF> 12+V1

Screen explanation

F/D⇒DATA SET

Operation guide

Present frequency setting mode

4-4

FUNC DATA

pressed and writing data

4-3-3 Switching the LED monitor On the normal operation, press FUNC to switch to LED monitor display. DATA When power is turned on, the monitor contents set by the function (E43) are displayed on the LED. E43 0 1 2 3 4 5

6 7

8 9 10 11 12

When stopping (E44 = 0) (E44 = 1) Setting frequency Setting frequency Setting frequency Output current Output voltage (specified value) Synchronous speed setting value Line speed setting value Load rotation speed setting value Torque calculation value Power consumption PID setting value PID remote setting value PID feedback value

When running (E44 =0,1)

Unit

Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)

Remarks

Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation)

Setting frequency Output current Output voltage (specified value)

A V

Synchronous speed

r/min.

Line speed

m/min.

Load rotation speed

r/min.

Torque calculation value

Power consumption

PID setting value PID remote setting value

− −

PID feedback value

−

For 4 digits or more, the last digits are cut, with x10, x100 marked on the indicator.

± indication

Displayed only when PID is effective in PID operation selection.

4-3-4 Menu screen The “Program menu” screen is shown below. Only four items can be displayed simultaneously. Move the cursor with ∧ or ∨ to select an item, then press FUNC DATA to display the next screen. 1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK ⇒5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR 7.ALM INF 8.ALM CAUSE 9.DATA COPY

Display 4.I/O CHECK ⇒5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR 7.ALM INF

4-3-5 Setting function data On the “program menu” screen, select "1. Data Setting" then the “Function Select” screen appears with function codes and names on it. Select the desired function.

60.00

RUN PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

FUNC DATA

60.00 ⇒1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

60.00 F00DATA PRTC F01FREQ COM 1 F02OPR METHOD F03MAX Hz-1

Function code

4-5

Function name

FUNC DATA

60.00 F01FREQ COM 1 0 0 − 11

Data setting range

Data

The function code consists of alphanumeric characters. function group.

Unique alphabetical letters are assigned for each

Table 4-3-1 Function code F00 - F42 E01 - E47 C01 - C33 P01 - P09 H03 - H39 A01 - A18 U01 - U61 o01 - o55

Function Fundamental Functions Extension Terminal Functions Control Functions of Frequency Motor Parameters High Performance Functions Alternative Motor Parameters User Functions Optional Functions

To scroll “Function Select” screen rapidly , use >> + alphabet.

Can be selected only with an option connected

or >> +

∧

>> +

∨

F00DATA PRTC F01FREQ CMD 1 F02OPR METHOD F03MAX Hz-1

Remarks

FUNC DATA

to move the screen in a unit grouped by

>> +

∨

F00DATA PRTC F01FREQ CMD 1 F02PPR METHOD F03MAX Hz-1

Select the desired function and press

∨

F42TRQVECTOR1 E01X1 F U N C E02X 2 F U N C E03X 3 F U N C

∧

A18SLIP COMP2 F00D ATA PRT C F01DATA PRTC F02OPR METHOD

to switch to the “data setting” screen.

On the “data setting” screen, the data values on the LCD can be increased or decreased in the smallest possible unit by pressing

∧

∨

Holding down

∧

∨

expands the rate of change, thereby

enabling values to be modified more rapidly. Otherwise, select the digit to be modified using >> , then set

data directly. When data is modified, the value before modification will be displayed at the same time for reference purpose.

To save the data, press

returns to the “Function Select” screen. data is saved by

FUNC DATA

. Pressing

RESET

cancels the changes made and

The modified data will be effective in inverter operation after the

The inverter operation does not change only if data is modified. When data

setting is disabled in the case of “Data protected” or “Data setting invalid during inverter running,” make necessary changes. Data cannot be modified for the following reasons : Table 4-3-2 Display LINK ACTIVE

NO SIGNAL(WE)

DATA PRTCTD INV RUNNING

FWD/REV ON

Reason for no modification Currently writing from RS-485/link option to Function is being made.

Release method Send a cancel command of function writing from RS-485. Stops a “Write” operation from the link. The edit enabling command function Among functions E01 to E09, turn the is selected using a general-purpose terminal of data 19 (edit enabling input terminal. command selection) ON. Data protection is selected for function Change function F00 to 0. F00. An attempt is made to change a Stop inverter operation. function that cannot be changed during inverter operation. An attempt is made to change a Turn FWD/REV command off. function that cannot be changed with the FWD/REV command on.

4-6

4-3-6

Checking function data

On the "Program menu" screen, select "2. DATA CHECK". function codes and names.

60.00

RUN FWD

60.00 PRG

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

1.DATA SETTING ⇒2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

Function code

The "Function Select" screen then appears with

FUNC DATA

FUNC

F00 DATA PRTC 0 0-1

Data changed from initial value

Select the desired function and press DATA to check the function data. switches to the "Data setting" screen, to modify data.

4-3-7

60.00

60.00 F00 0 F01 *1 F02 *1 F03 60Hz

Data

By pressing

FUNC DATA

, the screen

Monitoring operating status

On the "Program menu" screen, select "3. OPR MNTR" to display the present operating status of inverter. Use ∧ and ∨ to switch between the four operation monitor screens.

60.00

RUN FWD PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

60.00

60.00 PRG

1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK ⇒3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

FUNC DATA

Fout=xxxx.xHz Iout= x.xxA Vout= xxxV TRQ= xxx%

Output frequency Output current Output voltage Torque calculation method

∨

60.00 SYN=xxxxxx LOD=xxxxxx LIN=xxxxxx

60.00 Synchronous rotation speed (r/min) Load speed (r/min) Line speed (m/min.)

∨

Fref=xxxx.xHz xxx xx xx xx

∨

60.00 SV=xxxxx PV=xxxxx TLD= xxx% TLB= xxx%

PID setting value PID feedback value Driving torque limiting setting value Braking torque limiting setting

4-7

Setting frequency Operation status FWD/REV: Rotating direction IL: Current limiting VL: Voltage limiting LU: Under voltage TL: Torque limiting

4-3-8

I/O check

On the “Program menu” screen, select "4. I/O Check" to display analog and digital input/output signal status ∧ for the inverter and options. Use ∧ and ∨ to switch between the eight screens of data.

60.00

RUN

FWD PRG

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR ⇒4.I/O CHECK

60.00 □X2 ■FWD □X3 □REV □X4 □X1 □X5

FUNC DATA

Input terminal status (terminals)

□X6 □X7 :Signal OFF, :Signal ON □X8 □X9

REV

∨

60.00 □Y1 □Y2 □Y3 □Y4

Output terminal status

□Y5

60.00 ∨

:Signal OFF, :Signal ON

COMM □X2 □FWD □X3 □REV □X4 □X1 □X5

Input terminal status (via communication) □X6 □X7 :Signal OFF, :Signal ON □X8 □X9

∨

60.00

Analog input signal Terminal 12 input voltage Terminal 22 input voltage (AIO option) Terminal 32 input voltage (AIO option) Terminal V2 input voltage

12=± xx.xV 22= xx.xV 32=± xx.xV V2= xx.xV

60.00 ∨

Analog input signal Terminal C1 input current Terminal C2 input current (AIO option)

C1= xx.xmA C2= xx.xmA

∨

60.00 A0 =±xx.xV CS= xx.xmA DI = xxxxH D0= xxH

∨

60.00 P1=±xxxxx0p/s Z1= 0p/s P2=±xxxxx0p/s Z2= 0p/s

option input status Terminal AO output voltage (AIO option) Terminal CS output current (AIO option) Digital input voltage (HEX indication) Digital output voltage (HEX indication)

60.00

∨

PG/SY option input status Master-side A/B phase 4x frequency Unused Slave-side A/B phase 4x frequency Unused

4-8

FMA=xx.xV FMP=xx.xV FMP=xxxxp/s

Output for meter FMA output voltage FMP output voltage FMP output frequency

4-3-9

Maintenance information

On the "Program menu" screen, select "5. Maintenance" to display information necessary for maintenance and inspection. Use ∧ and ∨ to switch between the five screens of data.

60.00

RUN FWD PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

60.00 FUNC DATA

⇒5.MAINTENANC

60.00 TCAP=xxxxxh (61000h) TFAN=xxxxxh (25000h)

Capacitor on PC board accumulation time ( ):Judgment level.

TIME=xxxxxh E D C= xxxV TMPI=xxxx℃ TMPF=xxxx℃

Cumulative operating time DC link circuit voltage Maximum temperature inside inverter (Maximum value in hour units) Maximum temperature of heat sink (Maximum value in hour units)

∨

60.00 ∨

Imax=x.xxA CAP=xxx.x%

Maximum current(ms) (Maximum value in hour units) Main capacitor capacity

Cooling fan operating time ( ):Judgment level.

∨

60.00

60.00 NRK=xxxxx NRR=xxxxx NRO=xxxxx

No. of communication errors:keypad panel

∨

No. of communication errors:RS-485 No. of communication errors:option

4-9

INV=Hxxxx KEYPAD=Kxxxxx OPTION=Pxxxxx

ROM version: inverter (40HP or more: H xxxxx 30HP or less:S xxxxx) ROM version: keypad panel ROM version: option

4-3-10

Load rate measurement

On the "Program menu" screen, select "6. Load Rate Measurement". On the "Load rate measurement" screen, the maximum current, average current, and average breaking power during the set measuring time are measured and displayed.

60.00

RUN

60.00 FWD

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

60.00 T=150s Imax=0.00A Iave=0.00A BPave= 0.0%

PRG

1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK 5.MAINTENANC ⇒6.LOAD FCTR

60.00 FUNC DATA

FUNC DATA

60.00 T=3600s Imax=56.4A Iave=23.5A BPave= 10.4%

Measuring time

Change measuring using >> and ∧ and ∨ .

Start measuring Displays the remaining measuring time, when reaches zero, ends the measurement.

T=360s Imax=0.00A Iave=0.00A BPave= 0.0%

Display returns to initial values. Maximum current Average current Average breaking power (Motor rated output/100%)

4-10

60.00 T=600s Imax=0.00A Iave= 0.00A BPave= 0.0%

Set measuring time

4-3-11

Alarm information

On the "Program menu" screen, select "7. Alarm Information". Various operating data when the latest alarm occurred is displayed. Use ∧ and ∨ to switch between the nine screens of alarm information data.

60.00

RUN

60.00 FWD

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

OC1

1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

FUNC DATA

Fout=xxxx.xHz Iout= x.xxA Vout= xxxV TRQ= xxx%

5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR ⇒7.ALM INF

TMPI=xxxx℃ TMPF=xxxx℃

OC1 Cumulative operating hours at alarm occurrence DC link circuit voltage at alarm occurrence Temperature inside inverter at alarm occurrence Heat sink temperature at alarm occurrence

∨

REM □X2 □X6 □FWD □X3 □X7 □REV □X4 □X8 □X1 □X5 □X9

Fref=xxxx.xHz xxx xx xx xx

OC1

∨

Output voltage at alarm occurrence Torque calculation value at alarm occurrence

Setting frequency at alarm occurrence Operating status at alarm occurrence FWD/REV:Rotating direction IL :Current limiting VL :Voltage limiting LU :Under voltage TL :Torque limiting No. of communication errors at alarm occurrence:keypad panel No. of communication errors at alarm occurrence:RS-485 No. of communication errors at alarm occurrence:Options

NRK=xxxxx NRR=xxxxx NRO=xxxxx

∨

OC1

Output current at alarm occurrence

∨

OC1 TIME=xxxxxh EDC= xxxV

Code of latest alarm (High speed blinking during alarm alarm mode only) Output frequency at alarm occurrence

Input terminal status at alarm occurrence (terminals) □:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON

OC1

∨

□X2 □X6 □FWD □X3 □X7 □REV □X4 □X8 □X1 □X5 □X9

Input terminal status at alarm occurrence (communication)

COMM

Output terminal status at alarm occurrence

OC1 □Y1 □Y2 □Y3 □Y4

□:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON ∨

□Y5

OC1

∨

Previous alarm Before previous alarm Two times before previous

∨

OC1 5=xxx 4=xxx 3=xxx 2=xxx

□:Signal OFF, ■:Signal ON

Multiple alarms (Simultaneously occurring alarms) Alarm code

Up to four alarm codes can be displayed simultaneously.

4-11

0/1=xxx -1=xxx -2=xxx -3=xxx

xxx xxx xxx xxx

Latest alarm No. of occurrences Alarm history No. of occurrences Updated at alarm occurrence If the cause of alarm is the same as the same as the previous one, only the number of occurrences is incremented.

4-3-12

Alarm history and factors

On the "Program menu" screen, select "8.Alarm Factors" to display the alarm history. Press FUNC to display troubleshooting information for the alarm selected. DATA

60.00

RUN

60.00 FWD

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

PRG

1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

60.00 FUNC DATA

5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR 7.ALM INF ⇒8.ALM CAUSE

0/1=xxx -1=xxx -2=xxx -3=xxx

xxx xxx xxx xxx

xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx

Alarm code of the selected alarm

Alarm history

60.00 5=xxx 4=xxx 3=xxx 2=xxx

OC1

Latest alarm

FUNC DATA

Alarm occurrence factors of the selected alarm.

4-12

0/1=xxx -1=xxx -2=xxx -3=xxx

Multiple alarms (simultaneously occurring alarms)

Move the cursor using xxx xxx xxx xxx

∧

and

∨

to select one

of the alarm occurred.

4-3-13

Data copy

On the "Program menu" screen, select "9. Data Copy" to display the data copy read screen. A copy operation is then performed in the following order;reading inverter function data, removing the keypad panel, attaching the keypad panel to another inverter, and writing the data to the inverter. The "verify" feature also makes it possible to compare and check differences in the data stored in the keypad panel and the data stored in the inverter. Read data

Write data

60.00

Attach keypad panel, Turn power ON.

RUN

PRG

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

RUN

PRG

PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT

60.00 1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

PRG

60.00 1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR 7.ALM INF 8.ALM CAUSE ⇒9.DATA COPY FUNC DATA

DATA copy screen

5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR 7.ALM INF 8.ALM CAUSE ⇒9.DATA COPY

Mode (read mode)

<DATA COPY> ----READ

NAME Max. freq. 1

FUNC. F26

F04

Base freq. 1

E33

F05

Rated voltage 1

E34

F06

Max. voltage 1

E35

F09

Torque boost 1

E37

Electronic thermal 1 (Select) Electronic thermal 1 (Level) Electronic thermal 1 (Thermal time constant) Electronic thermal overload relay

F10

F11

F12 F13

H15

Motor 1

All of "A" code

Motor 2

In addition, when WRITE from inverter ROM No. is new one to old one, WRITE except F01(Freq. command 1) without ERROR display.

WRITE to the inverter with different capacity, voltage and series.

Inverter type of data stored by keypad panel

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE MEMORY ERROR

FUNC DATA

Reading

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 READ COMPLETE

Data of inverter type read by keypad panel

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

Read complete

NAME Motor sound OL function (Mode select) OL function (Level) OL function (Timer) OL2 function (Level) Auto-restart (Holding DC voltage)

All of "P" code

FUNC DATA

∧

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE

Remove keypad panel

FUNC. F03

FUNC DATA

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 READ

FUNC DATA

QQQQ

P04/A13 (Motor tuning), H03(Data initializing), H31(RS-485 address) and o26/AIO optional adjustment will NOT be written. - The function which will NOT be copied when different inverter type

60.00

<DATA COPY> ----READ

When WRITE to the type of the inverter (capacity, voltage and series) is same as the inverter type in copy origin, all of the function will be written. When the type of the inverter is different, the function except the following will be written. However, in both cases, F00(Data protection), P02/A11(Motor capacity),

Mode (write mode)

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE MEMORY ERROR

QQQQ

FUNC DATA

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE COMPLETE

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE

QQQQ

Writing

4-13

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

Write complete

Data check (verify)

Error processing

60.00

1) Change disabled during operation If a write operation is attempted during an inverter operation, or vice versa, the error message below will appear. RESET After stopping the inverter and pressing , retry the write operation.

RUN PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D ⇒LED SHIFT PRG

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE INV RUNNING

60.00 1.DATA SETTING 2.DATA CHECK 3.OPR MNTR 4.I/O CHECK

2) Memory error If a write operation is attempted while data has not been saved (i.e., no data) in the keypad panel data memory during the read mode, the following error message will appear:

5.MAINTENANC 6.LOAD FCTR 7.ALM INF 8.ALM CAUSE ⇒9.DATA COPY FUNC DATA

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 READ

∧

3) Verify error During a data check (verify) operation, if data stored in the keypad panel differs from data stored in the inverter, the following error message is displayed to indicate the function No. The data check is suspended. To continue the data check and check for other mismatching data, press FUNC DATA . To stop the data check and switch to another operation, press RESET .

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE

∧

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 VERIFY

WRITE MEMORY ERROR

Inverter type of data stored in the keypad panel

<DATA COPY> 075HP-4 WRITE ERR:F25

Mode (data check)

QQQQ

FUNC DATA

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 VERIFY

QQQQ

<DATA COPY> 040HP-4 VERIFY COMPLETE

QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ

4) Data protection When WRITE to the inverter which is protected by "Data protection" function, the following error message will appear. After released the protection, write Data check in progress operation is attempted. <DATA COPY> 040HP-4 WRITE DATA PRTCTD

Data check complete

4-14

4-3-14

Alarm mode

If an alarm occurs, the “Alarm screen” indicating the alarm contents is displayed. Use alarm history and multiple alarms (if more than two alarms occur simultaneously).

∧

Alarm detection order Alarm code

1.OC1 1=xxx xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx PRG⇒PRG MENU RESET⇒RESET

No. of consecutive occurrences Alarm name Operation guide

Alarm detection order Operation method

∧

∨

LED display 5. 4. 3. 2. 1. Blank

LCD display 5 4 3 2 1 0

Blank Blank Blank

-1 -2 -3

Description No. 5 alarm No. 4 alarm No. 3 alarm No. 2 alarm No. 1 alarm (more than two alarms occurred) Latest alarm (only one alarm occurred/alarm released) Previous alarm history Alarm history before previous alarm Alarm history two times before previous alarm

Alarm code: See Table 6-1-1

4-15

and

∨

to display

5. Function select 5-1 Function select list F:Fundamental Functions Func

Min. NAME

LCD Display

Setting range

Factory setting

Change

Unit

-30HP

40HP-

during op Set value

F00 Data protection

F00

DATA PRTC

0, 1

F01 Frequency command 1

F01

FREQ CMD 1

0 to 11

F02 Operation method

F02

OPR METHOD

0 to 4

F03 Maximum frequency 1

F03

MAX Hz-1

G11S: 50 to 400Hz P11S: 50 to 120Hz

F04 Base frequency 1

F04

BASE Hz-1

G11S: 25 to 400Hz

230:(230V class)

P11S: 25 to 120Hz F05 Rated voltage 1

F05

RATED V-1

0V: (Output voltage

(at Base frequency 1)

proportinal to sorce voltage)

460:(460V class)

80 to 240V: (230V class) 320 to 480V: (460V class) F06 Maximum voltage 1

F06

MAX V-1

(at Maximum frequency 1) F07

ACC TIME1

F08 Deceleration time 1

F08

DEC TIME1

F09 Torque boost 1

F09

F10 Electronic

(Select) F10

F11 thermal 1

(Level) F11 (Thermal time constant) F12

F13 Electronic thermal overload relay

320 to 480V: (460V class)

F07 Acceleration time 1

F12

80 to 240V: (230V class)

F13

230:(230V class)

460:(460V class)

0.01 to 3600s

0.01

TRQ BOOST1

0.0, 0.1 to 20.0

0.1

ELCTRN OL1

0, 1, 2

OL LEVEL1

INV rated current 20 to 135%

0.01

Motor rated current

min

0.1

TIME CNST1

0.5 to 75.0 min

DBR OL

G11S

[Up to 10[HP]]

(for braking resistor)

0, 1, 2

6.0

20.0 G11S:2.0 P11S:0.1

5.0

10.0 1

A A

[15[HP] and above ] 0 P11S

[Up to 15[HP]] 0, 2

[020[HP] and above ] 0 F14 Restart mode after

0 to 5

F14

RESTART

F15 Frequency limiter

(High) F15

H LIMITER

G11S: 0 to 400Hz

F16

(Low) F16

L LIMITER

P11S: 0 to 120Hz

(for freq. set signal) F17

FREQ GAIN

0.0 to 200.0%

F18

FREQ BIAS

G11S: -400.0 to +400.0Hz P11S: -120.0 to +120.0Hz

F20 DC brake

(Starting freq.) F20

DC BRK Hz

F21

(Braking level) F21

DC BRK LVL

F22

(Braking time) F22

DC BRK t

momentary power failure

F17 Gain F18 Bias frequency

0.1

100.0

0.1

0.0

0.0 to 60.0Hz

0.1

0.0

G11S: 0 to 100% P11S: 0 to 80%

0.0s(Inactive)

0.1

0.0

0.1

0.5

0.1

0.0

0.1 to 30.0s F23 Starting frequency F24 F25

(Freq.) F23 (Holding time) F24

Stop frequency

F25

START Hz

0.1 to 60.0Hz

HOLDING t

0.0 to 10.0s

STOP Hz

0.1 to 60.0Hz

0.1

0.2

kHz

F26 Motor sound

(Carrier freq.) F26

MTR SOUND

0.75 to 15kHz

F27

(Sound tone) F27

SOUND TONE

0 to 3

(Voltage adjust) F30

FMA V-ADJ

0 to 200%

100

(Function) F31

FMA FUNC

0 to 11

FMP PULSES

300 to 6000p/s (full scale)

p/s

1440

A A

F30 FMA F31 F33 FMP

(Pulse rate) F33

F34

(Voltage adjust) F34

FMP V-ADJ

0%, 1 to 200%

F35

(Function) F35

FMP FUNC

0 to 10

30RY MODE

0, 1

999

F36 30RY operation mode

F36

F40 Torque limiter 1

(Driving) F40

DRV TRQ 1

G11S: 20 to 200%, 999 P11S: 20 to 150%, 999

F41

(Braking) F41

BRK TRQ 1

G11S: 0%, 20 to 200%, 999 P11S: 0%, 20 to 150%, 999

TRQVECTOR1

0, 1

F42 Torque vector control 1

F42

5-1

User

Unit

No.

Remark

E:Extension Terminal Functions Func

Min. NAME

LCD Display

Setting range

Unit 0 to 35

Factory setting

Change

-30HP

X1 terminal function

E01

X1 FUNC

X2 terminal function

E02

X2 FUNC

E03

X3 terminal function

E03

X3 FUNC

E04

X4 terminal function

E04

X4 FUNC

E05

X5 terminal function

E05

X5 FUNC

E06

X6 terminal function

E06

X6 FUNC

E07

X7 terminal function

E07

X7 FUNC

E08

X8 terminal function

E08

X8 FUNC

E09

X9 terminal function

E09

X9 FUNC

E10

Acceleration time 2

E10

ACC TIME2

E11

Deceleration time 2

E11

E12

Acceleration time 3

E13

Deceleration time 3

E14

0.01

6.00

20.00

DEC TIME2

6.00

20.00

E12

ACC TIME3

6.00

20.00

E13

DEC TIME3

6.00

20.00

Acceleration time 4

E14

ACC TIME4

6.00

20.00

E15

Deceleration time 4

E15

DEC TIME4

6.00

20.00

E16

Torque limiter 2

(Driving) E16

DRV TRQ 2

(Braking) E17

BRK TRQ 2

E17

Remark

during op Set value

E02

40HP-

E01

0.01 to 3600s

User

Unit

No.

G11S: 20 to 200%, 999 P11S: 20 to 150%, 999

999

G11S: 0%, 20 to 200%, 999

999

P11S: 0%, 20 to 150%, 999 E20

Y1 terminal function

E20

Y1 FUNC

E21

Y2 terminal function

E21

Y2 FUNC

0 to 37

E22

Y3 terminal function

E22

Y3 FUNC

E23

Y4 terminal function

E23

Y4 FUNC

E24

Y5A, Y5C terminal func.

E24

Y5 FUNC

NA NA

E25

Y5 RY operation mode

E25

Y5RY MODE

0,1

E30

FAR function

(Hysteresis) E30

FAR HYSTR

0.0 to 10.0Hz

0.1

2.5

E31

FDT function

(Level) E31

FDT1 LEVEL

G11S: 0 to 400Hz P11S: 0 to 120Hz

(Hysteresis) E32

FDT1 HYSTR

0.0 to 30.0Hz

0.1

1.0

OL1 WARNING

0: Thermal calculation 1: Output current

(Level) E34

OL1 LEVEL

G11S: 5 to 200% P11S: 5 to 150%

0.01

Motor rated current

E32

signal

E33

OL1 function(Mode select)

E34

signal

E33

E35

(Timer) E35

OL1 TIMER

0.0 to 60.0s

0.1

10.0

E36

FDT2 function

(Level) E36

FDT2 LEVEL

G11S: 0 to 400Hz P11S: 0 to 120Hz

E37

OL2 function

(Level) E37

OL2 LEVEL

G11S: 5 to 200%

0.01

Motor rated current

P11S: 5 to 150% E40

Display coefficient A

E40

COEF A

-999.00 to 999.00

0.01

E41

Display coefficient B

E41

COEF B

-999.00 to 999.00

0.01

0.00

E42

DISPLAY FL

0.0 to 5.0s

0.1

0.5

LED MNTR

0 to 12

LED MNTR2

0, 1

LCD MNTR

0, 1

E42

LED Display filter

E43

LED Monitor

E44 E45

(Function) E43 (Display at STOP mode) E44

LCD Monitor

(Function) E45

E46

(Language) E46

LANGUAGE

0 to 5

E47

(Contrast) E47

CONTRAST

0(soft) to 10(hard)

C:Control Functions of Frequency Func

Min. NAME

LCD Display

Setting range

C01 Jump frequency

Unit (Jump freq. 1) C01

JUMP Hz 1

C02

(Jump freq. 2) C02

JUMP Hz 2

C03

(Jump freq. 3) C03

JUMP Hz 3

C04

(Hysteresis) C04

G11S: 0 to 400Hz P11Sï¼&#x161; 0 to 120Hz

JUMP HYSTR

0 to 30Hz

G11S: 0.00 to 400.00Hz P11S: 0.00 to 120.00Hz

0.01

C05 Multistep frequency

(Freq. 1) C05

MULTI Hz-1

C06 setting

(Freq. 2) C06

MULTI Hz-2

C07

(Freq. 3) C07

C08

Factory setting

Change

-30HP

40HP-

during op Set value

0.00

MULTI Hz-3

0.00

(Freq. 4) C08

MULTI Hz-4

0.00

C09

(Freq. 5) C09

MULTI Hz-5

0.00

C10

(Freq. 6) C10

MULTI Hz-6

0.00

C11

(Freq. 7) C11

MULTI Hz-7

0.00

C12

(Freq. 8) C12

MULTI Hz-8

0.00

C13

(Freq. 9) C13

MULTI Hz-9

0.00

C14

(Freq. 10) C14

MULTI Hz-10

0.00

C15

(Freq. 11) C15

MULTI Hz-11

0.00

C16

(Freq. 12) C16

MULTI Hz-12

0.00

C17

(Freq. 13) C17

MULTI Hz-13

0.00

C18

(Freq. 14) C18

MULTI Hz-14

0.00

C19

(Freq. 15) C19

MULTI Hz-15

0.00

5-2

User

Unit

No.

Remark

Func

Min. NAME

LCD Display

Setting range

Unit

C20 JOG frequency

C20

JOG Hz

G11S:0.00 to 400.00Hz P11S:0.00 to 120.00Hz

C21 PATTERN(Mode select)

C21

PATTERN

Factory setting

Change

-30HP

40HP-

during op Set value

0.01

5.00

0,1,2

0.01

0.00 F1

operation C22

(Stage 1) C22

STAGE 1

Operation time:0.00 to 6000s

C23

(Stage 2) C23

STAGE 2

F1 to F4 and R1 to R4

C24

(Stage 3) C24

STAGE 3

0.00 F1

C25

(Stage 4) C25

STAGE 4

0.00 F1

C26

(Stage 5) C26

STAGE 5

0.00 F1

C27

(Stage 6) C27

STAGE 6

0.00 F1

C28

(Stage 7) C28

STAGE 7

0.00 F1

0 to 11

C30 Frequency command 2

C30

FREQ CMD 2

C31 Offset adjust(terminal[12])

C31

BIAS 12

-100.0 to +100.0%

0.1

0.0

C32

GAIN 12

0.0 to +200.0%

0.1

100.0

C33 Analog setting signal filter

C33

REF FILTER

0.00 to 5.00s

0.01

0.05

P01

M1 POLES

2 to 14

M1-CAP

Up to 30[HP]: 0.01 to 60HP

P:Motor Parameters P01

Number of motor 1 poles

P02 Motor 1

(Capacity) P02

0.01

Motor Capacity

40[HP]and above: 0.01 to 800HP P03

(Rated current) P03

P04

M1-Ir

0.00 to 2000A

0.01

Motor rated current

(Tuning) P04

M1 TUN1

0, 1, 2

P05

(On-line Tuning) P05

M1 TUN2

0, 1

P06

(No-load current) P06

M1-Io

0.00 to 2000A

0.01

Fuji STANDARD RATED VALUE

P07

(%R1 setting) P07

M1-%R1

0.00 to 50.00%

0.01

Fuji STANDARD RATED VALUE

P08

(%X setting) P08

M1-%X

0.00 to 50.00%

0.01

Fuji STANDARD RATED VALUE

P09

SLIP COMP1

0.00 to 15.00Hz

0.01

0.00

H03

DATA INIT

0, 1

AUTO-RESET

0, 1 to 10 times

(Reset interval) H05

RESET INT

2 to 20s

H06

FAN STOP

0, 1

ACC PTN

0,1,2,3

P09 Slip compensation control 1

H:High Performance Functions H03 Data initializing

(Times) H04

H04 Auto-reset H05 H06 Fan stop operation

(Mode select) H07

H07 ACC/DEC pattern H08 Rev. phase sequence lock

H08

REV LOCK

0, 1

H09 Start mode

H09

START MODE

0, 1, 2

H10 Energy-saving operation

H10

ENERGY SAV

0, 1

G11S:0 P11S:1

H11 DEC mode

H11

DEC MODE

0, 1

H12 Instantaneous OC limiting

H12

INST CL

0, 1

NA NA

(Restart time) H13

RESTART t

0.1 to 10.0s

H14

(Freq. fall rate) H14

FALL RATE

0.00 to 100.00Hz/s

H15

(Holding DC voltage) H15

HOLD V

H16

(OPR command selfhold time) H16

H13 Auto-restart

0.1

Hz/s

0.01

10.00

3ph 230V class: 200 to 300V 3ph 460V class: 400 to 600V

230V class:235V 460V class:470V

SELFHOLD t

0.0 to 30.0s, 999

0.1

999

H18 Torque control

H18

TRQ CTRL

G11S:0, 1, 2, P11S:0 (Fixed)

H19 Active drive

H19

AUT RED

0, 1

H20 PID control

(Mode select) H20

PID MODE

0, 1, 2

H21

(Feedback signal) H21

FB SIGNAL

0, 1, 2, 3

H22

(P-gain) H22

P-GAIN

0.01 to 10.00 times

0.01

0.1

H23

(I-gain) H23

I-GAIN

0.0 , 0.1 to 3600s

0.1

0.0

A A

H24

(D-gain) H24

D-GAIN

0.00s , 0.01 to 10.0s

0.01

0.00

H25

(Feedback filter) H25

FB FILTER

0.0 to 60.0s

0.1

0.5

(Mode select) H26

PTC MODE

0, 1

(Level) H27

PTC LEVEL

0.00 to 5.00V

0.01

1.60

DROOP

G11S:-9.9 to 0.0Hz, P11S:0.0 (Fixed.)

0.1

0.0

LINK FUNC

0, 1, 2, 3

ADDRESS

0 (broadcast), 1 to 247

MODE ON ER

0, 1, 2, 3

TIMER

0.0 to 60.0s

0.1

2.0

H26 PTC thermistor H27 H28 Droop operation H30 Serial link H31 Modbus-RTU

H28 (Function select) H30 (Address) H31

H32

(Mode select on no response error) H32

H33

(Timer) H33

H34

(Baud rate) H34

BAUD RATE

0, 1, 2, 3

H35

(Data length) H35

LENGTH

0 (8-bit fixed)

H36

(Parity check) H36

PARITY

0, 1, 2

H37

(Stop bits) H37

STOP BITS

0(2bit), 1(1bit)

H38

(No response error detection time) H38

NO RES t

0 (No detection), 1 to 60s

H39

(Response interval) H39

INTERVAL

0.00 to 1.00s

0.01

5-3

User

Unit

No.

Remark

A:Alternative Motor Parameters Func

Min. NAME

LCD Display

Setting range

Unit

A01 Maximum frequency 2

A01

MAX Hz-2

A02 Base frequency 2

A02

BASE Hz-2

Factory setting

Change

-30HP

40HP-

during op Set value

G11S: 50 to 400Hz P11S: 50 to 120Hz

G11S: 25 to 400Hz

230:(230V class)

P11S: 25 to 120Hz A03 Rated voltage 2

A03

RATED V-2

(at Base frequency 2 )

0: 80 to 240V:(230V class)

460:(460V class)

320 to 480V:(460V class) A04 Maximum voltage 2

A04

MAX V-2

80 to 240V:(230V class) 320 to 480V:(460V class)

230:(230V class) 460:(460V class)

A05

TRQ BOOST2

0.0, 0.1 to 20.0

G11S:2.0

(at Base frequency 2) A05 Torque boost2

P11S:0.1 A06 Electronic thermal overload relay for motor 2

(Select) A06

ELCTRN OL2

0, 1, 2

OL LEVEL2

INV rated current 20%to135%

TIME CNST2

0.5 to 75.0 min

A09

TRQVECTOR2

0, 1

A10

M2 POLES

2 to 14 poles

M2-CAP

Up to 30HP:0.01 to 60HP

M2-Ir

A07

(Level) A07

A08

(Thermal time constant) A08

A09 Torque vector control 2 A10 Number of motor-2 poles

(Capacity) A11

A11 Motor 2

Motor rated current

0.01

min

0.1

5.0

10.0 0

A A NA

ploes

0.01

Motor capacity

0.00 to 2000A

40HP and above:0.01to800HP A12

(Rated current) A12

0.01

Motor rated current

A13

(Tuning) A13

M2 TUN1

0, 1, 2

A14

(On-line Tuning) A14

M2 TUN2

0, 1

A15

(No-load current) A15

M2-Io

0.00 to 2000A

0.01

Fuji standard rated value

A16

(%R1 setting) A16

A17

(%X setting) A17

A18

(Slip compensation control 2) A18

M2-%R1

0.00 to 50.00%

0.01

Fuji standard rated value

M2-%X

0.00 to 50.00%

0.01

Fuji standard rated value

SLIP COMP2

0.00 to 15.00Hz

0.01

0.00

U01

USER 01

0 to 65535

U02 1st S-shape level at acceleration

U02

USER 02

1 to 50%

U03 2nd S-shape level at acceleration

U03

USER 03

1 to 50%

U04 1st S-shape level at deceleration

U04

USER 04

1 to 50%

U05 2nd S-shape level at deceleration

U05

USER 05

1 to 50%

(Initial value) U08

USER 08

0 to 65535

xxxx

(Measured value) U09

USER 09

0 to 65535

A A

U:User Functions U01 Maximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit

U08 Main DC link capacitor U09

U10 PC board capacitor powered on time

U10

USER 10

0 to 65535h

U11 Cooling fan operating time

U11

USER 11

0 to 65535h

U13 Magnetize current vibration damping gain

U13

USER 13

0 to 32767

U15 Slip compensation filter time constant

U15

USER 15

0 to 32767

U23 Integral gain of continuous operation

U23

USER 23

0 to 65535

U24

USER 24

0 to 65535

U48

USER 48

0, 1, 2

at power failure U24 Proportional gain of continuous operation at power failure U48 Input phase loss protection U49 RS-485 protocol selection

819

A 410

556

546

1738

1000

1024

1000

-75HP

100HP-

U49

USER 49

0, 1

U56 Speed agreement

(Detection width) U56

USER 56

0 to 50%

U57 /PG error

(Detection timer) U57

USER 57

0.0 to 10.0s

0.1

0.5

U58 PG error selection

U58

USER 58

0, 1

U59 Braking-resistor function select(up to 30HP)

U59

USER 59

00 to A8(HEX)

U60 Regeneration avoidance at deceleration

U60

USER 60

0, 1

U61 Voltage detect offset and gain adjustment

U61

USER 61

Manufacturer's function(40HP or more)

--30HP：0(Fixed.) 40HP--：0, 1, 2

U89 Motor overload memory retention

U89

USER 89

0.1

5-4

User

Unit

No.

Remark

Table 5-1-1 The factory setting value (details) Function code *1 *2

230V P11S

230V G11S

Inverter type

FRNF25G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-2UX FRN001G11S-2UX FRN002G11S-2UX FRN003G11S-2UX FRN005G11S-2UX FRN007G11S-2UX FRN010G11S-2UX FRN015G11S-2UX FRN020G11S-2UX FRN025G11S-2UX FRN030G11S-2UX FRN040G11S-2UX FRN050G11S-2UX FRN060G11S-2UX FRN075G11S-2UX FRN100G11S-2UX FRN125G11S-2UX FRN007P11S-2UX FRN010P11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX FRN020P11S-2UX FRN025P11S-2UX FRN030P11S-2UX FRN040P11S-2UX FRN050P11S-2UX FRN060P11S-2UX FRN075P11S-2UX FRN100P11S-2UX FRN125P11S-2UX FRN150P11S-2UX

F11:Electric thermal1(Level) E34:OL1 function(Level) E37:OL2 function(Level) A07:Electric thermal overload relay for motor2 (Level)

[A] 1.40 2.00 3.00 5.80 7.90 12.6 18.6 25.3 37.3 49.1 60.0 72.4 91.0 115.0 137.0 174.0 226.0 268.0 18.6 25.3 37.3 49.1 60.0 72.4 91.0 115.0 137.0 174.0 226.0 268.0 337.0

P02:Motor1 (Capacity) A11:Motor2 (Capacity)

P03:Motor1 (Rated current) A12:Motor2 (Rated current)

[HP] 0.25 0.50 1.00 2.00 3.00 5.00 7.50 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 75.00 100.00 125.00 7.50 10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00 40.00 50.00 60.00 75.00 100.00 125.00 150.00

[A] 1.40 2.00 3.00 5.80 7.90 12.6 18.6 25.3 37.3 49.1 60.0 72.4 91.0 115.0 137.0 174.0 226.0 268.0 18.6 25.3 37.3 49.1 60.0 72.4 91.0 115.0 137.0 174.0 226.0 268.0 337.0

5-5

*1 *2

P06:Motor1 P07:Motor1 (No-load current) (%R1 setting) A15:Motor2 A16:Motor2 (No-load current) (%R1 setting)

[A] 1.12 1.22 1.54 2.80 3.57 4.78 6.23 8.75 12.7 9.20 16.7 19.8 13.6 18.7 20.8 28.6 37.4 29.8 6.23 8.75 12.7 9.20 16.7 19.8 13.6 18.7 20.8 28.6 37.4 29.8 90.4

[%] 11.02 6.15 3.96 4.29 3.15 3.34 2.65 2.43 2.07 2.09 1.75 1.90 1.82 1.92 1.29 1.37 1.08 1.05 2.65 2.43 2.07 2.09 1.75 1.90 1.82 1.92 1.29 1.37 1.08 1.05 0.96

*1 P08:Motor1 (%X setting) A17:Motor2 (%X setting)

[%] 13.84 8.80 8.86 7.74 20.81 23.57 28.91 30.78 29.13 29.53 31.49 32.55 25.32 24.87 26.99 27.09 23.80 22.90 28.91 30.78 29.13 29.53 31.49 32.55 25.32 24.87 26.99 27.09 23.80 22.90 21.61

Function code *1 *2

Inverter type

F11:Electric thermal1(Level) E34:OL1 function(Level) E37:OL2 function(Level) A07:Electric thermal overload relay for motor2 (Level)

P02:Motor1 (Capacity) A11:Motor2 (Capacity)

P03:Motor1 (Rated current) A12:Motor2 (Rated current)

*1 *2

P06:Motor1 P07:Motor1 (No-load current) (%R1 setting) A15:Motor2 A16:Motor2 (No-load current) (%R1 setting)

460V P11S

460V G11S

[A] [HP] [A] [A] [%] FRNF50G11S-4UX 1.00 0.50 1.00 0.61 6.15 FRN001G11S-4UX 1.50 1.00 1.50 0.77 3.96 FRN002G11S-4UX 2.90 2.00 2.90 1.40 4.29 FRN003G11S-4UX 4.00 3.00 4.00 1.79 3.15 FRN005G11S-4UX 6.30 5.00 6.30 2.39 3.34 FRN007G11S-4UX 9.30 7.50 9.30 3.12 2.65 FRN010G11S-4UX 12.7 10.00 12.7 4.37 2.43 FRN015G11S-4UX 18.7 15.00 18.7 6.36 2.07 FRN020G11S-4UX 24.6 20.00 24.6 4.60 2.09 FRN025G11S-4UX 30.0 25.00 30.0 8.33 1.75 FRN030G11S-4UX 36.2 30.00 36.2 9.88 1.90 FRN040G11S-4UX 45.5 40.00 45.5 6.80 1.82 FRN050G11S-4UX 57.5 50.00 57.5 9.33 1.92 FRN060G11S-4UX 68.7 60.00 68.7 10.40 1.29 FRN075G11S-4UX 86.9 75.00 86.9 14.30 1.37 FRN100G11S-4UX 113.0 100.00 113.0 18.70 1.08 FRN125G11S-4UX 134.0 125.00 134.0 14.90 1.05 FRN150G11S-4UX 169.0 150.00 169.0 45.20 0.96 FRN200G11S-4UX 231.0 200.00 231.0 81.80 0.72 FRN250G11S-4UX 272.0 250.00 272.0 41.10 0.71 FRN300G11S-4UX 323.0 300.00 323.0 45.10 0.53 FRN350G11S-4UX 375.0 350.00 375.0 68.30 0.99 FRN400G11S-4UX 429.0 400.00 429.0 80.70 1.11 FRN450G11S-4UX 481.0 450.00 481.0 85.50 0.95 FRN500G11S-4UX 534.0 500.00 534.0 99.20 1.05 FRN600G11S-4UX 638.0 600.00 638.0 140.00 0.85 FRN007P11S-4UX 9.30 7.50 9.30 3.12 2.65 FRN010P11S-4UX 12.7 10.00 12.7 4.37 2.43 FRN015P11S-4UX 18.7 15.00 18.7 6.36 2.07 FRN020P11S-4UX 24.6 20.00 24.6 4.60 2.09 FRN025P11S-4UX 30.0 25.00 30.0 8.33 1.75 FRN030P11S-4UX 36.2 30.00 36.2 9.88 1.90 FRN040P11S-4UX 45.5 40.00 45.5 6.80 1.82 FRN050P11S-4UX 57.5 50.00 57.5 9.33 1.92 FRN060P11S-4UX 68.7 60.00 68.7 10.40 1.29 FRN075P11S-4UX 86.9 75.00 86.9 14.30 1.37 FRN100P11S-4UX 113.0 100.00 113.0 18.70 1.08 FRN125P11S-4UX 134.0 125.00 134.0 14.90 1.05 FRN150P11S-4UX 169.0 150.00 169.0 45.20 0.96 FRN200P11S-4UX 231.0 200.00 231.0 81.80 0.72 FRN250P11S-4UX 272.0 250.00 272.0 41.10 0.71 FRN300P11S-4UX 323.0 300.00 323.0 45.10 0.53 FRN350P11S-4UX 375.0 350.00 375.0 68.30 0.99 FRN400P11S-4UX 429.0 400.00 429.0 80.70 1.11 FRN450P11S-4UX 481.0 450.00 481.0 85.50 0.95 FRN500P11S-4UX 534.0 500.00 534.0 99.20 1.05 FRN600P11S-4UX 638.0 600.00 638.0 140.00 0.85 FRN700P11S-4UX 756.0 700.00 756.0 164.00 1.02 FRN800P11S-4UX 870.0 800.00 870.0 209.00 1.17 note 1) The factory setting described on *1 is the value of Fuji standard induction motor 460V/50Hz/4-poles. The factory setting described on *1 is NOT changed automatically even function code P01/A10 (motor poles) is changed to excluding 4-poles. note 2) The minimum units of the data *2 is as follows. Current value Minimum units [A] [A] 0.00 to 9.99 0.01 10.0 to 99.9 0.1 100 to 999 1 1000 to 9990 10

5-6

*1 P08:Motor1 (%X setting) A17:Motor2 (%X setting)

[%] 8.80 8.86 7.74 20.81 23.57 28.91 30.78 29.13 29.53 31.49 32.55 25.32 24.87 26.99 27.09 23.80 22.90 21.61 20.84 18.72 18.44 19.24 18.92 19.01 18.39 18.38 28.91 30.78 29.13 29.53 31.49 32.55 25.32 24.87 26.99 27.09 23.80 22.90 21.61 20.84 18.72 18.44 19.24 18.92 19.01 18.39 18.38 21.92 21.69

5-2 Function Explanation Ｆ：Fundamental function F00

Data protection Forward / Inverse operation

XSetting can be made so that a set value cannot be changed by keypad panel operation. F 0

0 D A T A

Setting range

P R T C

Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values 19)

Forward operation (set value: 1, 3, 4, 5)

Frequency setting value Maximum frequency

0 : The data can be changed. 1 : The data cannot be changed.

[Setting procedure ] 0 to 1: Press the

STOP

and

Inverse operation (set value::6)

Set value:1,3

∧

keys simultaneously

to change the value from 0 to 1, then press the FUNC DATA

to validate the change.

1 to 0: Press the

STOP

and

∨

-10

+10 [V]

keys simultaneously

Analog input terminal [12] , [V2]

to change the value from 1 to 0, then press the FUNC DATA

Related functions: E01 to E09 (Set value 21)

Set value:4,5

key to validate the change.

- Maximum frequency

F01

Frequency command 1

XThis function selects the frequency setting method. F 0

1 F R E Q

Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values 17,18) C30

Maximum frequency

C M D 1

0 : Setting by keypad panel operation ( ∧ ∨ key) 1 : Setting by voltage input (terminal [12 ](0 to +10V) + terminal [V2](0 to +10V) ) 2: Setting by current input (terminal [C1] (4 to 20mA)). 3: Setting by voltage input + current input (terminal [12] + terminal [C1] ) (-10 to +10V + 4 to 20mA). 4: Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal [12] (-10 to +10V)) 5: Reversible operation with polarity ( terminal [12] +[V2]+[V1](Option) (-10 to +10V)) Related functions: 6: Inverse mode operation E01 to E09 (terminal [12] +[V2] (+10V to 0 )) (Set value 21) 7: Inverse mode operation (terminal [C1] (20 to 4mA)) 8: Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 1 Related functions: (initial value = 0) (terminals [UP] and [DOWN]) E01 to E09 9: Setting by UP/DOWN control mode 2 (Set value 17,18) (initial value =last final value) (terminals [UP] and [DOWN]) See the function explanation of E01 to E09 for details. Related functions: C21to C28 10: Setting by pattern operation

Forward operation (set value: 2)

Frequency setting value

Inverse operation (set value: 7)

0 0

20 [mA] Analog input terminal [C1]

F02

Operation method

XThis function sets the operation command input method. F

2 O P R

M E T H O D

Setting range 0: Key pad operation (

FWD

Press the

REV FWD

STOP

keys).

for forward operation.

Press the

REV

for reverse operation.

Press the

STOP

for deceleration to a stop.

Input from terminals [FWD] and [REV] is ignored. (LOCAL) 1: Terminal operation( STOP key active)

See the function explanation C21 to C28 for details. 11: Setting by digital input or pulse train * Optional. For details, see the instruction manual on options.

2: Terminal operation(

STOP

key inactive)

STOP

key active)

3: Terminal operation( with Fuji start software.

4: Terminal operation( STOP key inactive) with Fuji start software. * - This function can only be changed when terminals FWD and REV are open. - REMOTE/LOCAL switching from the keypad panel automatically changes the set value of this function. - REMOTE/LOCAL can be changed by pressing the STOP key and RESET key simultaneously.

5-7

[LE] Frequency setting

F01

C30 Feedback selection

[Hz2/Hz1]

H21

Frequency setting by keypad panel

â&#x2C6;¨

Frequency setting signals

[12]

Gain

Bias

C31

C32

Feedback filter

Gain

[C1] [V2]

Forward/ Reverse operation

F18

Negative polarity prevention

H20

Operation selection

#1,#2,#3,#6,#7

H22

Proportional

H23

Integral

H24

Differential

Inverse Inverse

PID control

Bias frequency

F17

#6 [V1]

H25

â&#x2C6;§

#1,#5

Limit signal

Option

C33

Analog input filter

[IVS] [UP] [DOWN]

#8,#9

Limiter processing

UP/DOWN control Maximum frequency

#11

D/I or pulse train (optional)

#10 Pattern operation control

Upper-limit frequency

A01 F15

Multistep frequency

C21

switching

H30

C12 C22

F03

C05 C06

C24

C07

C25

C08

C01

Set frequency value by Link function

C13 C23

Jump frequency

C14

Set frequency value

C02

Multistep frequencies 1 to 15

C03

C15 C04 JOG frequency

C16 C26

C20 Lower-limit frequency

C09 C17

C27

C10

C28

C11

C18 C19

[SS1] [SS2] [SS4]

Switching command

[SS8] [JOG] [Hz2/PID]

note) The numbers marked "#" means the setting value of each functions.

Frequency setting block diagram

5-8

F16

F03

Maximum

frequency 1

XThis function sets the maximum output frequency for motor 1. XThis is a function for motor 1. F 0

3 M A X

H z

Setting range G11S: 50 to 400 Hz P11S: 50 to 120Hz Setting a value higher than the rated value of the device to be driven may damage the motor or machine. Match the rating of the device. F04 Base frequency 1 XThis function sets the maximum output frequency in the constant-torque range of motor 1 or the output frequency at the rated output voltage. Match the rating of the motor. XThis is a function for motor 1. F 0

4 B A S E

H z

Acceleration time 1

F08

Deceleration time 1

XThis function sets the acceleration time for the output frequency from startup to maximum frequency and the deceleration time from maximum frequency to operation stop. F 0 F 0

7 A C C 8 D E C

T T

I I

M E 1 M E 1

Setting range Acceleration time 1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds Deceleration time 1: 0.01 to 3,600 seconds

Acceleration and deceleration times are represented by the three most significant digits, thereby the setting of three high-order digits can be set. Set acceleration and deceleration times with respect to maximum frequency. The relationship between the set frequency value and acceleration/deceleration times is as follows: Set frequency = maximum frequency The actual operation time matches the set value. STOP

FWD Output frequency

Setting range G11S: 25 to 400Hz P11S: 25 to 120Hz Note: When the set value of base frequency 1 is higher than that of maximum output frequency 1, the output voltage does not increase to the rated voltage because the maximum frequency limits the output frequency.

F07

Output voltage Constant-torque range F06 Maximum output voltage 1 F05 Rated voltage 1

Maximum frequency Set frequency

Time Acceleration time

Output frequency 0

F05

F04 Base frequency 1

F03 Maximum output frequency

Rated voltage 1

Set frequency < maximum frequency The actual operation time differs from the set value. Acceleration(deceleration) operation time = set value x (set frequency/maximum frequency)

XThis function sets the rated value of the voltage output to motor 1. Note that a voltage greater than the supply (input) voltage cannot be output. XThis is a function for motor 1. V

230 V series: 0, 80 to 240V 460 V series: 0, 320 to 480V Value 0 terminates operation of the voltage regulation function, thereby resulting in the output of a voltage proportional to the supply voltage. Note: When the set value of rated voltage 1 exceeds maximum output voltage 1, the output voltage does not increase to the rated voltage because the maximum output voltage limits the output voltage.

Setting range

F06

Maximum

voltage 1

XThis function sets the maximum value of the voltage output for motor 1. Note that a voltage higher than the supply (input) voltage cannot be output. XThis is a function for motor 1. F 0

6 M A X

STOP

FWD Output frequency

F 0 5 R A T E D

Deceleration time

Maximum frequency

Set frequency

Time

Acceleration operation time

Deceleration operation time Acceleration time

Deceleration time

Note: If the set acceleration and deceleration times are too short even though the resistance torque and moment of inertia of the load are great, the torque limiting function or stall prevention function becomes activated, thereby prolonging the operation time beyond that stated above.

Setting range

230 V series: 80 to 240V 460 V series: 320 to 480V Note: When the set value of rated voltage 1 (F05) to "0", this function is invalid.

5-9

F09 Torque boost 1 XThis is a function for motor 1. The following can be selected: F 0 9 T R Q B O O S T 1

Output voltage V

-- Selection of load characteristics such as automatic torque boost, square law reduction torque load, proportional torque load, constant torque load. -- Enhancement of torque (V/f characteristics), which is lowered during low-speed operation. Insufficient magnetic flux of the motor due to a voltage drop in the low-frequency range can be compensated. Setting range Characteristics selected Automatic torque boost characteristic 0.0

#20.0

1.0 to 1.9 2.0 to 20.0

100%

Output voltage V

Base frequency 1

#0.9 17% 0

100%

Rated voltage 1

17%

#0.1 Output frequency f

Output frequency f

<Constant torque> Output voltage V Rated voltage 1

100%

#20.0

23%

Electric thermal O/L relay (Thermal time constant)

Output frequency f

0 E L C T R N

Operation level current (%)

Rated voltage 1

100%

Base frequency 1

#0.9 #0.1

Output frequency f

1 O L

O L 1

L E V E L 1

(%)

Output voltage V

F12

The setting range is 20 to 135% of the rated current of the inverter.

XTorque characteristics(40HP or above) <Square law reduction torque> <Proportional torque>

18%

Electric thermal O/L relay (level)

F 1 Base #2.0 frequency 1

100%

F11

Set value 0: Inactive 1: Active (for general-purpose motor) 2: Active (for inverter motor) XThis function sets the operation level (current value) of the electronic thermal. Enter a value from 1 to 1.1 times the current rating value of the motor. XThe set value "2" is set for the inverter motor because there is no cooling effect decrease by the rotational speed.

#1.0

Electric thermal O/L relay ( select)

F 1

Base frequency 1

#1.9

F10

The electronic thermal O/L relay manages the output frequency, output current, and operation time of the inverter to prevent the motor from overheating when 150% of the set current value flows for the time set by F12 (thermal time constant). XThis is a function for motor 1. XThis function specifies whether to operate the electronic thermal O/L relay and selects the target motor. When a general-purpose motor is selected, the operation level is lowered in the low speed range according to the cooling characteristics of the motor.

XTorque characteristics(30HP or less) <Square law reduction torque> <Proportional torque> Rated voltage 1

Output frequency f

Note: As a large torque boost value creates overexcitation in the low-speed range, continued operation may cause the motor to overheating. Check the characteristics of the driven motor.

Constant torque (linear change)

Output voltage V

Base #2.0 frequency 1

10%

where the torque boost value of a constant torque load (a linear change) is automatically adjusted. The motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set to "2" for this function is valid. Square law reduction torque for fan and pump loads. Proportional torque for middle class loads between square law reduction torque and constant torque (linear change)

0.1 to 0.9

Rated voltage 1

100%

Rated voltage 1

Base frequency 1

#1.9 18% 0

#1.0

W hen F10 = 2

100 95 90 85 69 54

30toto60HP 45kW 40 (W hen (When F10F10 = 1)= 1 ) 0.25 0.2toto30HP 22kW (When F10 = 1) (W hen F10 = 1 ) fe= fb (fb< 60Hz) 60Hz (fbâ&#x2030;Ľ 60Hz) fb:Base frequency

Output frequency f

fe Output frequency f0 (Hz) Operation level current and output frequency Fe x 0.33

5-10

Fe x 0.83

Operation level current (%)

F13

75HP 125HP 110kWto or above

(%) 100 90 85

This function controls the frequent use and continuous operating time of the braking resistor to prevent the resistor from overheating. Related functions: U59 F 1 3 D B R O L

(W hen F10 = 1 )

53 fb (fb< 60Hz) 60Hz (fb≥ 60Hz) fb:Base frequency

fe=

Electric thermal O/L relay (for breaking resistor)

Inverter capacity G11S: 10HP or less

fe Output frequency f0 (Hz) Operation level current and output frequency Fe x 0.33

100 90 85

P11S: 15HP or less G11S: 15HP or more P11S: 20HP or more

150HP 110kW ororabove above

(%)

Operation level current (%)

Fe x 0.83

53 fb (fb< 60Hz) 60Hz (fb≥ 60Hz) fb:Base frequency

fe Output frequency f0 (Hz) Operation level current and output frequency Fe x 0.33

Fe x 0.83

XThe time from when 150% of the operation level current flows continuously to when he electronic thermal O/L relay activates can be set. The setting range is 0.5 to 75.0 minutes (in 0.1 minute steps). F 1

2 T

M E

C N S T 1

Current-Operation tim e Characteristics 20

Operation time（min）

changed by F12

F12=10

F12=5

F12=0.5

0 0

100

150

0: Inactive

XWhen the setting value is selected to "2", the type of braking resistor and connection circuit are set by U59. The details are referred to the function : U59.

(W hen F10 = 1 )

fe=

Operation 0: Inactive 1: Active (built-in braking resistor) 2: Active (DB***-2C/4C external braking resistor) 0: Inactive 2: Active (DB***-2C/4C external braking resistor)

200

(output current/operation level current) x 100(%)

5-11

F14

Restart mode after momentary power failure

XThis function selects operation if a momentary power failure occurs. The function for detecting power failure and activating protective operation (i.e., alarm output, alarm display, inverter output cutoff) for undervoltage can be selected. The automatic restart function (for automatically restarting a coasting motor without stopping) when the supply voltage is recovered can also be selected. XWhen setting value is selected "2" or "3", both integration constant and the proportional constant during operation ride-though can be adjusted by the function code : U23 and U24. The details are referred to the function code : U23 and U24. Related functions: F 1 4 R E S T A R T U23, U24 Setting range: 0 to 5 The following table lists the function details. Set value ０

Function name

Operation at power failure

Inactive (immediate inverter trip)

１

Inactive (inverter trip at recovery)

２

Inactive (inverter trip after deceleration to a stop at Note1 power failure)

３

Active (operation ride through, Note1 for high-inertia loads)

４

Active (restart with the frequency at power Note1 failure) Active (restart with the start frequency, for low-inertia Note1 loads)

５

Operation at power recovery

If undervoltage is detected, the drive will immediately trip and an undervoltage fault (LU) is displayed. The drive output stops and the motor will coast to a stop. If undervoltage is detected, the drive output stops and the motor will immediately coast to a stop. A drive fault is not activated

The drive operation is not automatically restarted. Input a reset command and operation command to restart operation. An undervoltage fault (LU) is activated at power recovery. Drive operation is not automatically restarted. Input a reset command to restart operation. When the DC bus voltage reaches the continue operation The drive operation is not automatically voltage level (H15), a controlled deceleration to a stop occurs. restarted. Input a reset command and The inverter collects the inertia energy of the load to maintain operation command to restart operation. the DC bus voltage and controls the motor until it stops, then an undervoltage fault (LU) is activated. The drive will automatically decrease the deceleration time if necessary. If the amount of inertia energy from the load is small, and the undervoltage level is achieved before the motor stops, the undervoltage fault is immediately activated and the motor will coast to a stop. When the DC bus voltage reaches the continue operation Operation is automatically restarted. voltage level (H15), energy is collected from the inertia of the For power recovery during ride-through the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and extend the ride drive will accelerate directly to the original through time. The drive will automatically adjust the frequency. If undervoltage is detected, deceleration rate to maintain DC bus voltage level. If operation automatically restarts with the undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not frequency at the time that the undervoltage activated, but drive output stops and the motor coast to a is detected. stop. If undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not Operation is automatically restarted with activated. The drive output stops and the motor will coast to a the frequency at power failure. stop. If undervoltage is detected, the protective function is not Operation is automatically restarted with activated, but output stops. the frequency set by F23, "Starting frequency."

Note1) When the function code H18(Torque control) is excluding "0" and Motor 1 is selected, the inverter will trip at power recovery if function code F14 is set to between "2" and "5". This operation is same as F14 is set to "1". Function codes H13 to H16 are provided to control a restarting operation after momentary power failure. These functions should be understood and used. The pick-up (speed search) function can also be selected as a method of restarting when power is recovered following a momentary failure. (For setting details, see function code H09.) The pick-up function searches for the speed of the coasting motor to restart the motor without subjecting it to excessive shock. In a high-inertia system, the reduction in motor speed is minimal even when the motor is coasting. A speed searching time is required when the pick-up function is active. In such a case, the original frequency may be recovered sooner when the function is inactive and the operation restarted with the frequency prior to the momentary power failure. The pick-up function works in the range of 5 to 100 Hz. If the detected speed is outside this range, restart the motor using the regular restart function.

• Automatically restart could be provided at power recovered, if "Restart mode after

WARNING

momentary power failure" is valid.

• The machine should be designed to securing the human safe even restarting. Accident may result.

5-12

Power failure Power failure

Power recovery

Set value : 3

Set value : 0 Main circuit DC voltage

Power recovery

H15 Operation continuation level

Main circuit DC voltage

Under voltage

Time

Output frequency

(motor speed) LV trip

LV trip

Set value : 1 Main circuit DC voltage

Output (terminals Y1 to Y5)

Under voltage

Set value : 4 Time Output frequency

LV trip

Set value : 2

Main circuit DC voltage

ON H15 Operation continuation level

Output frequency

Under voltage

Synchronization

H13:Waiting time

(motor speed)

Main circuit DC voltage

Acceleration

LV trip

Time Output frequency

LV trip

Output (terminals Y1 to Y5)

Set value : 5

Main circuit DC voltage

Output frequency

Under voltage

H13:Waiting time

(motor speed) LV trip Output (terminals Y1 to Y5)

Note : Dotted-dashed lines indicate motor speed.

5-13

F15

Frequency limiter

F18

(High)

Bias frequency

XThis function adds a bias frequency to the set frequency value to analog input.

F16 Frequency limiter (Low) XThis function sets the upper and lower limits for the setting frequency . F 1 5 H L I M I T E R F 1 6 L L I M I T E R

F 1

8 F R E Q

A S

Setting range G11S: -400.0 to +400.0Hz P11S: -120.0 to +120.0Hz The operation follows the figure below. When the bias frequency is higher than the maximum frequency or lower than the - maximum frequency, it is limited to the maximum or - maximum frequency.

Setting range G11S: 0 to 400Hz P11S: 0 to 120Hz Set frequency

Bias frequency (when positive)

Set frequency value

+ Maximum frequency

+Maximum frequency Upper limit value

-100%

Lower limit value Lower limit value

-10

+100%

Upper limit value

+10[V]

20[mA]

Analog input +10V terminal 12 20mA terminal C1

Set frequency

-Maximum frequency

- Maximum frequency

※ The inverter output starts with the start frequency when operation begins, and stops with the stop frequency when operation ends. ※ If the upper limit value is less than the lower limit value, the upper limit value overrides the lower limit value. ※ When lower limit value is set, the inverter operates with lower limit value at operation command is "ON" even frequency command is zero(0Hz). F17

※ Reversible operation is valid if the function code F01/C30 is set to "4" or "5" only. ※ This function is invalid if PID control is selected(H20 is "1" or "2").

Gain

Operation follows the figure below.

DC brake

(starting frequency)

F21

DC brake

(Braking level)

F22

DC brake

(Braking time)

Setting range: 0 to 60Hz XOperation level: This function sets the output current level when a DC injection brake is applied. Set a percentage of inverter rated output current in 1% steps. Fsteps. 2 1 D C B R K L V L

Set frequency value 200% 100% 50% -10

F20

XStarting frequency: This function sets the frequency with which to start a DC injection brake to decelerate the motor to a stop. F 2 0 D C B R K H z

XThis function sets the rate of the set frequency value to analog input. F 1 7 F R E Q G A I N

+Maximum frequency

Bias frequency (when negative)

0 4

Analog input +10V terminal 12 20［mA］ 20mA terminal C1

+10[V]

Setting range G11S: 0 to 100% P11S: 0 to 80% XTime: This function sets the time of a DC injection brake operation. F 2 2 D C B R K t Setting range 0.0: Inactive 0.1 to 30.0 seconds

CAUTION Do not use the inverter brake function for mechanical holding. Injury may result.

-Maximum frequency

5-14

Starting frequency

F24

Start frequency

F25

(frequency)

(Holding time)

Stop frequency

The starting frequency can be set to reserve the torque at startup and can be sustained until the magnetic flux of the motor is being established. XFrequency: This function sets the frequency at startup. F 2

3 S T A R T

Setting range:

H z

0.1 to 60Hz

XHolding time: This function sets the holding time during which the start frequency is sustained at startup. F 2

4 H O L D

N G

Set values: 0.1 to 10.0 seconds ∗The holding time does not apply at the time of switching between forward and reverse. ∗The holding time is not included in the acceleration time. ∗The holding time also applies when pattern operation (C21) is selected. The holding time is included in the timer value.

F27

5 S T O P

Setting range:

F 2

7 M T R

Setting range:

T O N E

0 , 1, 2 , 3

F30

FMA

(voltage adjust)

F31

FMA

(function)

Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can be output to terminal FMA as a DC voltage. The amplitude of the output can also be adjusted. XThis function adjusts the voltage value of the monitor item selected in F31 when the monitor amount is 100%. A value from 0 to 200 (%) can be set in 1% steps. F 3 0 F M A V - A D J Setting range:

0 to 200% F30:200% F30:100%

Higher than 10V 10V

H z

0.0 to 60.0Hz

Output frequency

(sound tone)

XThe tone of motor noise can be altered when the carrier frequency is 7kHz or lower. Use this function as required.

XThis function sets the frequency at stop. F 2

Motor sound

FMA terminal output voltage

F23

Forward rotation

F30:50%

F30:0% 50%

Holding time

100%

XThis function selects the monitor item to be output to terminal FMA. F 3 1 F M A F U N C

Starting frequency Stopping frequency Time

The operation does not start when the starting frequency is less than the stopping frequency or when the setting frequency is less than the stopping frequency. F26

Motor sound

(carrier frequency)

XThis function adjusts the carrier frequency, correct adjustment of which prevents resonance with the machine system, reduces motor and inverter noise, and also reduces leakage current from output circuit wiring. F 2 6 M T R S O U N D

G11 P11

Nominal applied motor 75HP or less 100HP or more 30HP or less 40HP to 100HP 125HP or more

Setting range 0.75 to 15kHz 0.75 to 10kHz 0.75 to 15kHz 0.75 to 10kHz 0.75 to 6kHz

Carrier frequency Low High Motor noise High Low Output current waveform Bad Good Leakage current Small amount Large amount Noise occurrence Extremely low High Notes: 1. Reducing the set value adversely affects the output current waveform (i.e., higher harmonics), increases motor loss, and raises motor temperature. For example, at 0.75kHz, reduce the motor torque by about15%. 2 Increasing the set value increases inverter loss and raises inverter temperature.

Set value 0

Monitor item

Definition of 100% monitor amount

Output frequency 1 (before slip compensation)

Maximum output frequency Maximum output frequency

Output frequency 2 (after slip compensation) Output current

Output voltage

4 5 6 7 8

Output torque Load rate Power consumption PID feedback amount PG feedback amount (only when option is installed)

DC link circuit voltage

Rated output current of inverter x 2 230V series: 250V 460V series: 500V Rated torque of motor x 2 Rated load of motor x 2 Rated output of inverter x 2 Feedback amount of 100% Synchronous speed at maximum frequency

230V series: 500V 460V series: 1,000V 10 Universal AO 0 to 10V output through communication and not related to inverter operation. ※The power consumption shows "0" during regenerative load.

5-15

F33

FMP

(pulse rate)

F34

FMP

F35

FMP terminal

F36

(voltage adjust) (function)

Monitor data (e.g.,output frequency, output current) can be output to terminal FMP as pulse voltage. Monitor data can also be sent to an analog meter as average voltage. When sending data to a digital counter or other instrument as pulse output, set the pulse rate in F33 to any value and the voltage in F34 to 0%. When data is sent to an analog meter or other instrument as average voltage, the voltage value set in F34 determines the average voltage and the pulse rate in F33 is fixed to 2670 (p/s).

Set value 0 1

3 F M P

Setting range:

Operation At normal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON At abnormal 30A - 30C: ON, 30B - 30C:OFF At normal 30A - 30C:ON, 30B - 30C: OFF At abnormal 30A - 30C: OFF, 30B - 30C: ON

XWhen the set value is 1, contacts 30A and 30C are connected when the inverter control voltage is established (about one second after power on). XWhen the power is off, contacts 30A and 30C are OFF; 30B and 30C are ON.

XThis function sets the pulse frequency of the monitor item selected in F35 within a range of 300 to 6000 (p/s) in 1 p/s steps. F 3

30Ry operation mode

XThis function specifies whether to activate (excite) the alarm output relay (30Ry) for any fault at normal or alarm status. F 3 6 3 0 R Y M O D E

30A

P U L S E S

30B

300 to 6,000 p/s 30C

T1 About 15.6V 0V

Pulse frequency (p/s) = 1/T Duty (%) = T1/T x 100 Average voltage (V) = 15.6 x T1/T The output terminal of the FMP terminal is composed of the transistor, therefore there is a saturation voltage MAX (0.5V ). When using in the analogue by the filter processing the pulse voltage, it should be make a 0V adjustment by external equipment. XThis function sets the average voltage of pulse output to terminal FMP. 4 F M P

A D J

Setting range 0%: The pulse rate varies depending on the monitor amount of the monitor item selected in F35. (The maximum value is the value set in F33. The pulse duty is fixed at 50%.) 1 to 200%: Pulse rate is fixed at 2,670 p/s. The average voltage of the monitor item selected in F35 when the monitor amount is 100% is adjusted in the 1 to 200% range (1% steps). (The pulse duty varies.)

5 F M P

(driving)

F41

Torque limiter 1

(braking)

Related functions: U01, U60

F 4 F 4 Function Torque limit (driving)

XThis function selects the monitor item to be output to terminal FMP. F 3

Torque limiter 1

XThe torque limit operation calculates motor torque from the output voltage, current and the primary resistance value of the motor, and controls the frequency so the calculated value does not exceed the limit. This operation enables the inverter to continue operation under the limit even if a sudden change in load torque occurs. XSelect limit values for the driving torque and braking torque. XWhen this function is activated, acceleration and deceleration operation times are longer than the set values. XThe motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set to "2" for this function is valid. XThe increase frequency upper bound during torque limit operation is set by function code : U01. XWhen the setting value is selected "0" (prevent OU trip), the operation mode is selected by function code : U60. The details are referred to the functions : U01, U60.

T VL:0.5VMAX Pulse cycle time

F 3

F40

Torque limit (braking)

F U N C

The set value and monitor items are the same as those of F31.

0 D R V 1 B R K

Setting range G11S:20% to 200% P11S:20% to 150%

Operation The torque is limited to the set value.

999 G11S:20% to 200% P11S:20% to 150%

Torque limiting inactive The torque is limited to the set value.

Prevents OU trip due to power regeneration effect automatically. Torque limiting inactive

999

5-16

T R Q 1 T R Q 1

WARNING When the torque limit function is selected, an operation may not match the set acceleration and deceleration time or set speed. The machine should be so designed that safety is ensured even when operation does not match set values. Accident may result.

WARNING The frequency may be stagnated / not decelerate when using the automatically OU trip prevention and set the frequency limit(Low) to the setting frequency or less. Accident may result. F42

Torque vector control 1

XThis is a function for motor 1. XTo obtain the motor torque most efficiently, the torque vector control calculates torque according to load, to adjust the voltage and current vectors to optimum values based on the calculated value. Related functions: P01, P09

F 4

2 T R Q V

E C T O R 1

Set value Operation 0 Inactive 1 Active XWhen 1 (Active) is set, the set values of the following functions differ from the written values: c F09 Torque boost 1 Automatically set to 0.0 (automatic torque boosting). d P09 Slip compensation amount Slip compensation is automatically activated. When 0.0 is set, the amount of slip compensation for the FUJI standard 3-phase motor is applied. Otherwise, the written value is applied. XUse the torque vector control function under the following conditions: c There must be only one motor. Connection of two or more motors makes accurate control difficult. dThe function data (rated current P03, no-load current P06, %R1 P07, and %X P08) of motor 1 must be correct. When the standard FUJI 3-phase motor is used, setting the capacity (function P02) ensures entry of the above data. An auto tuning operation should be performed for other motors. eThe rated current of the motor must not be significantly less than the rated current of the inverter. A motor two ranks lower in capacity than the nominal applied motor for the inverter should be used at the smallest (depending on the model). fTo prevent leakage current and ensure accurate control, the length of the cable between the inverter and motor should not exceed 164ft(50m). gWhen a reactor is connected between the inverter and the motor and the impedance of the wiring cannot be disregarded, use P04, "Auto tuning," to rewrite data. If these conditions are not satisfied, set 0 (Inactive).

5-17

E:Extension Terminal Functions

E09

X9 Terminal function

～

Multistep frequency selection [SS1][SS2][SS4][SS8]

Each function of digital input terminals X1 to X9 can be set as codes. E E E E E E E E E Set value

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

X X X X X X X X X

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

F F F F F F F F F

U U U U U U U U U

N N N N N N N N N

C C C C C C C C C

Function

0,1,2,3 Multistep frequency selection (1 to 15 steps) [SS1],[SS2],[SS4],[SS8] Acceleration and deceleration time selection (3 steps) [RT1],[RT2] 4,5 Self-hold selection [HLD] 6 Coast-to-stop command [BX] 7 Alarm reset [RST] 8 External alarm [THR] 9 Jogging [JOG] 10 Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 [Hz2/Hz1] 11 Motor 2/motor 1 [M2/M1] 12 DC injection brake command [DCBRK] 13 Torque limit 2/torque limit 1 [TL2/TL1] 14 Switching operation from line to inverter (50Hz) [SW50] 15 Switching operation from line to inverter (60Hz) [SW60] 16 UP command [UP] 17 DOWN command [DOWN] 18 Edit permission command (data change permission) [WE-KP] 19 PID control cancellation [Hz/PID] 20 Forward/inverse switching (terminals 12 and C1) [IVS] 21 Interlock (52-2) [IL] 22 Torque control cancellation [Hz/TRQ] 23 Link operation selection (Standard:RS-485, Option: BUS) [LE] 24 Universal DI [U-DI] 25 Start characteristics selection [STM] 26 PG-SY enable ( Option ) [PG/Hz] 27 Synchronization command ( Option ) [SYC] 28 Zero speed command with PG option [ZERO] 29 Forced stop command [STOP1] 30 Forced stop command with Deceleration time 4 [STOP2] 31 Pre-exiting command with PG option [EXITE] 32 Line speed control Cancellation [Hz/LSC] 33 Line speed frequency memory [LSC-HLD] 34 Frequency setting 1 / Frequency setting 2 [Hz1/Hz2] 35 Note: Data numbers which are not set in the functions from E01 to E09, are assumed to be inactive.

The frequency can be switched to a preset frequency in function codes C05 to C19 by switching the external digital input signal. Assign values 0 to 3 to the target digital input terminal. The combination of input signals determines the frequency. Combination of set value input signals 3 2 1 0 [SS8]

[SS4]

[SS2]

[SS1]

off off off off off off off off on on on on on on on on

off off off off on on on on off off off off on on on on

off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on

off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on

Frequency selected Assigned by F01 or C30 C05 MULTI Hz-1 C06 MULTI Hz-2 Related function C07 MULTI Hz-3 C05 to C19 C08 MULTI Hz-4 C09 MULTI Hz-5 C10 MULTI Hz-6 Setting range C11 MULTI Hz-7 C12 MULTI Hz-8 C13 MULTI Hz-9 C14 MULTI Hz-10 C15 MULTI Hz-11 C16 MULTI Hz-12 C17 MULTI Hz-13 C18 MULTI Hz-14 C19 MULTI Hz-15

The acceleration and deceleration time can be switched to a preset time in function codes E10 to E15 by switching the external digital input signal. Assign values 4 and 5 to the target digital input terminal. The combination of input signals determines the acceleration and deceleration times. Combination of set value input signals Acceleration and deceleration times selected 5 4 [RT2]

[RT1]

off

F07 ACC TIME1 F08 DEC TIME1 E10 ACC TIME2 E11 DEC TIME2 E12 ACC TIME3 E13 DEC TIME3 E14 ACC TIME4 E15 DEC TIME4

Setting range 0.01 to 3600s Related function F07～F08 E10～E15

3-wire operation stop command [HLD] This selection is used for 3-wire operation. The FWD or REV signal is self-held when [HLD] is on, and the self-hold is cleared when [HLD] is turned off. To use this [HLD] terminal function, assign 6 to the target digital input terminal.

FW D

Forward rotation

HLD

Reverse rotation

Ignore d

REV

5-18

G11S:0.00 to 400.00Hz P11S:0.00 to 120.00Hz

Acceleration and deceleration time selection [RT1][RT2]

Output frequency

X1 Terminal function

～

E01

Coast-to-stop command [BX] When BX and P24 are connected, inverter output is cut off immediately and the motor starts to coast-to-stop. An alarm signal is neither output nor self-held. If BX and P24 are disconnected when the operation command (FWD or REV) is on, operation starts at the start frequency. To use this BX terminal function, assign value "7" to the target digital input terminal.

Output Frequency

FWD

Forward rotation

Ignored

Forward rotation

REV ON

Alarm reset [RST]

Frequency setting 2/frequency setting 1 [Hz1/Hz2]

When an inverter trip occurs, connecting RST and P24 clears the alarm output (for any fault) ; disconnecting them clears trip indication and restarts operation. To use this RST terminal function, assign value "8" to the target digital input terminal. External fault [THR] Disconnecting THR and P24 during operation cuts off inverter output (i.e., motor starts to coast-to-stop) and outputs alarm OH2, which is self-held internally and cleared by RST input. This function is used to protect an external brake resistor and other components from overheating. To use this THR terminal function, assign value "9" to the target digital input terminal. ON input is assumed when this terminal function is not set. Jogging operation[JOG] This function is used for jogging (inching) operation to position a work piece. When JOG and P24 are connected, the operation is performed with the jogging frequency set in function code C20 while the operation command (FWD-P24 or REV-P24) is on. To use this JOG terminal function, assign value "10" to the target digital input terminal. Note: It is possible to change to the JOG operation by keypad panel when keypad panel operation. JOG Input Operation command (FWD/REV) Operation mode

OFF

STOP

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

RUN

JOG OPR.

WARNING - When the JOG command and operation command (FWD/REV) are input at the same time, it can NOT be changed to the JOG operation. It operates with setting frequency. - When the JOG operation is used, it should be input the operation command after input the JOG command during the inverter is STOP. - When the JOG command and operation command are input at the same time, the JOG command is assigned to the "Multistep frequency selection (SS1 to SS8)" and used it. - The inverter can NOT be stopped and JOG operation is continued even JOG command is OFF during JOG operation. The inverter is deceleration to a stop if the operation command is OFF. Accident may result.

JOG OPR.

NOR. OPR.

This function switches the frequency setting method set in function codes F01 and C30 by an external digital input signal. Set value input signal Frequency setting method selected 11 F01 FREQ CMD1 off on C30 FREQ CMD2 Note: It can not be used with set value "35" simultaneously. When the set value "11" and "35" are selected, "Er6" is displayed. Motor 2/motor 1 [M1/M2] This function switches motor constants using an external digital input signal. This input is effective only when the operation command to the inverter is off and operation has stopped and does not apply to the operation at 0Hz. Set value input signal Related function Motor selected 12 A01ď˝&#x17E;A18 off on

Motor 1 Motor 2

DC brake command [DCBRK] When the external digital input signal is on, DC injection braking starts when the inverter's output frequency drops below the frequency preset in function code F20 after the operation command goes off. (The operation command goes off when the STOP key is pressed at keypad panel operation and when both terminals FWD and REV go on or off at terminal block operation.) The DC injection braking continues while the digital input signal is on. In this case, the longer time of the following is selected: - The time set in function code F22. - The time which the input signal is set on. Set value input signal Operation selected 13 off No DC injection brake command is given. on A DC injection brake command is given.

5-19

Torque limit 2/torque limit 1 [TL2/TL1] This function switches the torque limit value set in function codes F40 and F41, and E16 and E17 by an external digital input signal. Set value input signal 14

off on

Torque limit value selected

Related function F40～F41 E16～E17

F40 DRV TRQ1 F41 BRK TRQ1 E16 DRV TRQ2 E17 BRK TRQ2

Setting range DRV 20 to 200% ,999 BRK 0, 20 to 200% ,999

Switching operation between line and inverter (50Hz) [SW50] Motor operation can be switched from 50Hz commercial power operation to inverter operation without stopping the motor by switching the external digital input signal. Set value input signal 15 off→on on→off

Combination of set value input signals 18 17 off off off on

Holds the output frequency. Increases the output frequency according to the acceleration time. Decreases the output frequency on off according to the deceleration time. on on Holds the output frequency. There are the two types of UP/DOWN operations as shown below. Set the desired type by setting the frequency (F01 or C30). XThe data "8: UP/DOWN 1" is valid only when the Motor 2 is selected. Frequency Initial value Operation command reentry setting at power during deceleration input on (F01 or C30) Operates at the frequency at reentry. Frequency

Function

8 (UP/DOWN1)

Inverter operation to line operation (50Hz) Line operation to inverter operation (50Hz)

Switching operation between line and inverter (60Hz) [SW60] Motor operation can be switched from 60Hz commercial power operation to inverter operation without stopping the motor by switching the external digital input signal. Set value input signal Function 16 Inverter operation to line operation (60Hz) off→on Line operation to inverter operation (60Hz) on→off XWhen the digital input signal goes off, 50 or 60 Hz is output according to the set value input signal after the restart waiting time following a momentary power failure (function code H13). The motor is then directed to inverter operation.

0Hz

FWD (REV)

ON OFF

Returns to the frequency before deceleration 9 (UP/DOWN2)

WARNING - After the LU(Low Voltage) trip is occurred and reset it, the inverter will automatically restart because the operation command is kept by internal sequence. Accident may result.

Previous frequency

Frequency FWD (REV)

ON OFF

Write enable for KEYPAD [WE-KP] This function allows the data to be changed only when an external signal is being input, thereby making it difficult to change the data. 19 Function selected off Inhibit data changes. on Allow data changes. Note: If a terminal is set to value 19, the data becomes unable to be changed. To change the data, turn on the terminal and change the terminal setting to another number. PID control cancel [Hz/PID]

UP command [UP]/DOWN command [DOWN] When an operation command is input (on), the output frequency can be increased or decreased by an external digital input signal. The change ranges from 0 to maximum frequency. Operation in the opposite direction of the operation command is not allowed. Related function F01, C30

Function selected (when operation command is on)

Related function E01～E09 (set value: 11, 35)

5-20

The PID control can be disabled by an external digital input signal. Set value Related function input signal Function selected H20～H25 20 off on

Enable PID control. Disable PID control (frequency setting from keypad panel).

Link enable (RS-485 standard, BUS) [LE]

Inverse mode changeover [IVS] The analog input (terminals 12 and C1) can be switched between forward and inverse operations by an external digital input signal. Set value Related function input signal Function selected F01, C30 21 Forward operation when forward off operation is set and vice versa Inverse operation when forward on operation is set and vice versa XThis function is invalid when the PID control is selected(H20: 1 or 2). Interlock signal (52-2) [IL] When a contactor is installed on the output side of the inverter, the contactor opens at the time of a momentary power failure, which hinders the reduction of the DC circuit voltage and may prevent the detection of a power failure and the correct restart operation when power is recovered. The restart operation at momentary power failure can be performed effectively with power failure information provided by an external digital input signal. Set value input signal 22 off on

Function selected

Related function F14

No momentary power failure detection operation by digital input Momentary power failure detection operation by digital input

Frequency and operation commands from the link can be enabled or disabled by switching the external digital input signal. Select the command source in H30, "Link function." Assign value "24" to the target digital input terminal and enable or disable commands in this input signal state. Set value input signal 24 off on

Set value input signal 23 off

Function selected

Torque control function inactive The input voltage to terminal 12 is the frequency command value. PID feedback amount when PID control operation is selected (H20 = 1 or 2).

WARNING - The motor speed may be changed quickly when the "Torque control cancel" is changed to ON or OFF because of changing the control. Accident may result.

Link command disabled. Link command enabled.

Assigning value "25" to a digital input terminal renders the terminal a universal DI terminal. The ON/OFF state of signal input to this terminal can be checked through the RS-485 and BUS option. This input terminal is only used to check for an incoming input signal through communication and does not affect inverter operation. Pick up start mode [STM] The start characteristics function (pick-up mode) in function code H09 can be enabled or disabled by switching the external digital input signal. Assign value "26" to the target digital input terminal and enable or disable the function in this input signal state. Set value Related function input signal Function selected H09 26 off Start characteristic function disabled on Start characteristic function enabled PG-SY enable ( Option ) [PG/Hz] Zero speed command with PG option [ZERO] Pre-exiting command with PG option [EXITE] These functions are used for PG-Option or SY-Option card. Refer to each instruction manual. Forced stop command with Deceleration [STOP1]

Related function H18

Torque control function active The input voltage to terminal 12 is the torque command value.

Related function H30

Universal DI (U-DI)

Torque control cancel [Hz/TRQ] When function code H18 (torque control function selection) is set to be active (value 1 or 2), this operation can be canceled externally Assign value "23" to the target digital input terminal and switch between operation and no operation in this input signal state.

Function selected

Forced stop command with Deceleration time 4 [STOP2] Normally this terminal should be “ON”, when this terminal goes off during motor running, the motor decelerates to stop, and outputs alarm “Er6 “. When the inverter is stop by STOP1/STOP2 signal, the signal should be kept on 4ms or longer. In case of terminal [STOP2], the deceleration time is determined by E15( DEC TIME4). This function is prioritized under any operation (Terminal. Keypad, Communication...operation). However when the torque limiter/regeneration avoidance at deceleration is selected, the time which is set by deceleration time may be longer. In case of [STOP2], time is fixed by E15 (EDC TIME4)

Output Frequency FWD or REV

[STOP1] or [STOP2]

Alarm

5-21

Er6

Related functions E01 to E09 (Set values:14)

Line speed control Cancellation [Hz/LSC] Line speed frequency memory [LSC-HLD] XThese functions are used for OPC-G11S-PG / PG2 and PGA. Refer to each instruction manual. Frequency setting 1 / Frequency setting 2 [Hz1/Hz2] XThis function switches the frequency setting method set in function codes F01 and C30 by an external digital input signal. This is the reverse-logic of setting value "11"(Frequency setting 2/Frequency setting 1 [Hz2/Hz1]).

E E E E E E

1 1 1 1 1 1

Terminal X1 Terminal X2 Terminal X3 Terminal X4 Terminal X5 Terminal X6

Terminal X7 Terminal X8 Terminal X9

6 7 8

E11

Deceleration time 2

E12

Acceleration time 3

E13

Deceleration time 3

E14

Acceleration time 4

E15

Deceleration time 4

T T T T T T

I I I I I I

M M M M M M

E E E E E E

2 2 3 3 4 4

FWD (REV)

Time

X3 P24

Maximum frequency

Accel time 1

Multistep frequency selection [SS1] Multistep frequency selection [SS2] Multistep frequency selection [SS4] Multistep frequency selection [SS8] Acceleration and deceleration selection [RT1] Acceleration and deceleration selection [RT2] Self-hold selection [HLD] Coast-to-stop command [BX] Alarm reset [RST] Acceleration time 2

C C C C C C

Operation

Setting at factory shipment Description

E10

C E C E C E

Output frequency

Settings when shipped from the factory

Set value 0 1 2 3 4

A D A D A D

XExample: When 4 and 5 are set to terminals X2 and X3:

Set value input signal Frequency setting method selected 35 C30 FREQ CMD2 off on F01 FREQ CMD1 Note: It can not be used with set value "11" simultaneously. When the set value "11" and "35" are selected, "Er6" is displayed.

Digital input

0 1 2 3 4 5

Decel Accel time time 1 2

Decel Accel time time 2 3

Decel time 3

Accel time 4

E16

Torque limiter 2 (driving)

E17

Torque limiter 2 (braking)

Decel time 4

XThis function is used to switch the torque limit level set in F40 and F41 by an external control signal. Input an external signal by selecting any of the control input terminals (X1 to X9) as torque limit 2/torque limit 1 (value 14) in E01 to E09. XThe motor tuning (P04 / A13) should be set to "2" for this function is valid. XMaximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit is set by U01. Related functions U01 U60

XThe operation mode is set by U60 when the setting value is "0%: Regeneration avoidance at deceleration". The detail is referred to the U01, U60. Related functions E01ď˝&#x17E;E09 (Set value: 14)

XAcceleration time 1 (F07) and deceleration time 1 (F08) as well as three other types of acceleration and deceleration time can be selected. XThe operation and setting ranges are the same as those of acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1. See explanations for F07 and F08. XFor switching acceleration and deceleration times, select any two terminals from terminal X1 (function selection) in E01 to terminal X9 (function selection) in E09 as switching signal input terminals. Set "4" (acceleration and deceleration time 1) and "5" (acceleration and deceleration time 2) to the selected terminals and input a signal to each terminal to switch acceleration and deceleration times. Switching is possible during acceleration, deceleration, or constant-speed operation.

5-22

E 1 E 1

6 D R V 7 B R K

T R Q T R Q

2 2

E24

Y5A and Y5C terminal function

Inverter running [RUN]

～

Y1 terminal function

～

E20

XSome control and monitor signals can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5]. Terminals [Y1] to [Y4] use transistor output; terminals[Y5A] and [Y5C] use relay contacts.

E E E E E

2 2 2 2 2

0 1 2 3 4

Y Y Y Y Y

1 2 3 4 5

F F F F F

U U U U U

N N N N N

"Running" means that the inverter is outputting a frequency. “RUN” signal is output as when there is output speed (frequency). When the DC injection brake function is active, “RUN” signal is off. Frequency equivalence signal [FAR] See the explanation of function code E30 (frequency arrival [detection width]). Frequency level detection [FDT1] See the explanation of function codes E31 and E32 (frequency detection).

C C C C C

Undervoltage detection signal [LV]

Set Output signal value 0 Operating [RUN] 1 Frequency arrival [FAR] 2 Frequency detection [FDT1] 3 Stopping due to undervoltage [LV] 4 Torque polarity detection [B/D] 5 Torque limiting [TL] 6 Restarting after momentary power failure [IPF] 7 Overload early warning [OL1] 8 During keypad panel operation [KP] 9 Inverter stopping [STP] 10 Ready for operation [RDY] 11 Operation switching between line and inverter [SW88] 12 Operation switching between line and inverter [SW52-2] 13 Operation switching between line and inverter [SW52-1] 14 Motor 2 switching [SWM2] 15 Terminal AX function [AX] 16 Pattern operation stage change [TU] 17 Pattern operation cycle operation completed [TO] 18 Pattern operation stage number [STG1] 19 Pattern operation stage number [STG2] 20 Pattern operation stage number [STG4] 21 Alarm detail [AL1] 22 Alarm detail [AL2] 23 Alarm detail [AL4] 24 Alarm detail [AL8] 25 Cooling fan operating [FAN] 26 Retry function operating [TRY] 27 Universal DO [U-DO] ∗ 28 Heat sink overheat early warning [OH] Synchronization completed by synchronous operation card [SY] ∗ 29 30 Life expectancy detection signal [LIFE] 31 2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2] 32 2nd OL level detection [OL2] 33 Terminal C1 off signal [C1OFF] Speed existence signal [DNZS] ∗ 34 35 Speed agreement signal [DSAG] ∗ 36 PG error signal [PG-ABN] ∗ 37 Torque limiting (Signal with delay) [TL2] Note: For output signals marked "∗" are used for RS-485 communication, OPC-G11S-PG / PG2, PGA or OPC-G11S-SY. Refer to each instruction manual.

5-23

If the undervoltage protective function activates, i.e. when the main circuit DC voltage falls below the undervoltage detection level, an ON signal is output. The signal goes off when the voltage recovers and increases above the detection level. The ON signal is retained while the undervoltage protective function is activating. Undervoltage detection level: 230V series: 200V, 460V series: 400V. Torque polarity [B/D] This function determines the torque polarity calculated in the inverter and outputs a signal indicating driving or braking torque. An OFF signal is output for driving torque; an ON signal is output for braking torque. Torque limiting [TL] When the torque limiting activates, the stall prevention function is automatically activated to change the output frequency. The torque limiting signal is output to lighten the load, and also used to display overload conditions on the monitor device. This ON signal is output during the current or torque is limited or power regeneration is prevented. Auto-restarting

[IPF]

Following a momentary power failure, this function reports the start of the restart mode, the occurrence of an automatic pull-in, and the completion of the recovery operation. Following a momentary power failure, an ON signal is output when power is recovered and a synchronization (pull-in) operation is performed. The signal goes off when the frequency (before power failure) is recovered. For 0Hz restart at power recovery, no signal is output because synchronization ends when power is recovered. The frequency is not recovered to the frequency before the power failure occurrence. Overload early warning [OL1] Before the motor stops by the trip operation of an electronic thermal O/L relay, this function outputs an ON signal when the load reaches the overload early warning level. Either the electronic thermal O/L relay early warning or output current overload early warning can be selected. For setting procedure, see “E33 Overload early warning (operation selection)”, and "E34 Overload early warning (operation level)." Note: This function is effective for motor 1 only. Keypad operation mode [KP] An ON signal is output when operation command keys ( FWD , REV and STOP ) on the keypad panel can be used (i.e., 0 set in "F02 Operation") to issue operation and stop commands. This signal is OFF when the function H30(Serial link) is set to communication side.

Inverter stopping [STOP]

Alarm indication [AL1] [AL2] [AL4] [AL8]

This function outputs an inverted signal to Running (RUN) to indicate zero speed. An ON signal is output when the DC injection brake function is operating. Ready output [RDY] This function outputs an ON signal when the inverter is ready to operate. The inverter is ready to operate when the main circuit and control circuit power is established and the inverter protective function is not activating. About one second is required from power-on to ready for operation in normal condition. Line/Inv changeover [SW88] [SW52-2] [SW52-1] To perform switching operation between the line and the inverter, the sequence prepared in the inverter can be used to select and output signals for opening and closing the magnetic contactors connected to the inverter. As the operation is complex, refer to technical documentation for the FRENIC5000G11S series when using this function. As the sequence will operate automatically when SW88 or SW52-2 is selected, do not select when not using the sequence. Motor 2 /Motor 1 [SWM2]

This function reports the operating status of the inverter protective function. Alarm detail Output terminal (inverter protective function) AL1 AL2 AL4 AL8 Overcurrent, ground fault, fuse blown on off off off Overvoltage off on off off Undervoltage shortage, input phase failure on on off off Motors 1 and 2 overload off off on off Inverter overload on off on off Heat sink overheating, inverter inside overheating off on on off External alarm input, braking resistor overheating on on on off Memory error, CPU error off off off on Keypad panel communication error, option communication error on off off on Option error off on off on Output wiring error off off on on RS-485 communication error on off on on Overspeed, PG disconnection off on on on In normal operation terminals do not output a signal. Fan operation signal [FAN] When used with "H06 Cooling fan ON/OFF control," this function outputs a signal while the cooling fan is operating. Auto-resetting [TRY]

When a signal for switching to motor 2 is input from the terminal selected by terminals [X1] to [X9], this function selects and outputs the signal for switching the magnetic contactor for the motor. As this switching signal is not output during running including when the DC injection braking function is operating, a signal must be re-input after output stops.

When a value of 1 or larger is set to "H04 Retry operating," the signal is output while retry operation is activating when the inverter protective function is activated. Universal DO [U-DO] Assigning value "27" to a transistor output terminal renders the terminal a universal DO terminal. This function enables ON/OFF through the RS-485 and BUS option. This function serves only to turn on and off the transistor output through communication and is not related to inverter operation.

Auxiliary terminal [AX] When an operation (forward or reverse) command is entered, this function outputs an ON signal. When a stop command is entered, the signal goes off after inverter output stops. When a coast-to-stop command is entered and the inverter protective function operates, the signal goes off immediately.

Overheat early warning [OH]

Time-up signal for pattern operation [TU]

This function outputs a early warning signal when heat sink temperature is (overheat detection level - 10℃) or higher.

When the pattern operation stage changes, this function outputs a one-shot (100ms) ON signal to report a stage change. Cycle completion signal for pattern operation [TO] When the seven stages of a pattern operation are completed, this function outputs a one-shot (100 ms) ON signal to report the completion of all stages. Stage No. indication for pattern operation [STG1] [STG2] [STG4] During pattern operation, this function reports the stage (operation process) being operated. Pattern operation Output terminal stage No. STG1 STG2 STG4 Stage 1 ｏｎｏｆｆｏｆｆ Stage 2 ｏｆｆｏｎｏｆｆ Stage 3 ｏｎｏｎｏｆｆ Stage 4 ｏｆｆｏｆｆｏｎ Stage 5 ｏｎｏｆｆｏｎ Stage 6 ｏｆｆｏｎｏｎ Stage 7 ｏｎｏｎｏｎ When pattern operation is not activated (i.e., no stage is selected), the terminals do not output a signal.

5-24

Life expectancy detection signal [LIFE] XWhen either of data for the Life expectancy judgment of the function code:U09 to U11 reaches at the Life expectancy judgment level, the ON signal is output. However, the inverter does not do alarm. Moreover, the alarm output for any fault (30A, 30B, 30C ) does not operate. Function Parts of Life expectancy code Life expectancy judgment judgment level U09 Capacitor in main circuit 85% or less of the initial value U10 Electrolytic capacitor on PCB 61,000 hours U11 Cooling fan 25,000 hours U59 DC fan broken for stir internal DC fan is broken unit up [40HP or more is corresponded.]

In the following cases, normal life judgment of the capacitor in main circuit may not be able to be performed. 1. When a power is turned off during inverter operation. 2. When cooling fan ON/OFF control is operated. ( function code : H 06= 1) 3. When the power is supplied by the auxiliary input terminals (R0,T0). 4. When the option card is operated . 5. When RS-485 communication is operated . 6. When the power supply is turned off with digital input (FWD, REV, X1-X9) of a control terminal being ON. In the case of "3", "4", "5" and "6", life judgment is enabled by adjusting the function both code:U08 and U09.

E25

Y5 Ry operation mode

XThis function specifies whether to excite the Y5 relay at “ON signal mode” or “OFF signal mode”. E 2

5 Y 5 R Y

M O D E

Set value 0

Operation At “OFF signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: OFF At “ON signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: ON 1 At “OFF signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: ON At “ON signal mode” Y5A - Y5C: OFF XWhen the set value is "1", contacts Y5A and Y5C are connected when the inverter control voltage is established (about one second after power on).

Related functions U08～U11, U59

FAR function signal (Hysteresis)

E30

XThis function adjusts the detection width when the output frequency is the same as the set frequency (operating frequency). The detection width can be adjusted from 0 to ±10 Hz of the setting frequency.

2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2] This function is same as Frequency detection [FDT1], the detection level of the output frequency and hysteresis width are determined by E36 and E32.

E 3

0 F A R

H Y S T R

Setting range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz When the frequency is within the detection width, an ON signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5].

2nd OL level early warning [OL2] This function outputs an ON signal when the output current exceeds “E37 OL2 LEVEL” for longer than “E35 OL TIMER”. NOTE) This function is valid for both of Motor 1 and Motor 2.

Output frequency

+Detection width Set frequency

-Detection width +Detection width

Terminal C1 off signal [C1OFF]

Set frequency

This function outputs an ON signal when the input current of terminal C1 is less than 2mA. (When AIO option is connected, it can be detected the disconnection of C2 terminal.)

-Detection width

Time

Frequency detection signal (terminals Y1 to Y5)

Synchronization completed by synchronous operation card [SY] Speed agreement signal [DSAG] PG error signal [PG-ABN] XThe above functions are set for OPC-G11S-PG / PG2 or PGA. Refer to each instruction manual. Torque limiting (Signal with delay) [TL2] XThe turning on signal is output by continuing the limiting action(Torque limit operation, regeneration avoidance operation and overcurrent limiting operation) of 20ms or more.

Terminal Y1 Terminal Y2 Terminal Y3 Terminal Y4 Terminal Y5

FDT1 function signal (Level)

E32

FDT1 function signal (Hysteresis)

XThis function determines the operation (detection) level of the output frequency and hysteresis width for operation release. When the output frequency exceeds the set operation level, an ON signal can be selected and output from terminals [Y1] to [Y5]. E 3 E 3

1 F D T 1 L E V E L 2 F D T H Y S T R

Setting range(Operation level) : G11S: 0 to 400 Hz P11S: 0 to 120 Hz (Hysteresis width) : 0.0 to 30.0 Hz

Settings when shipped from the factory Digital input

E31

Setting at factory shipment Set value Description 0 Operating [RUN] 1 Frequency arrival [FAR] 2 Frequency detection [FDT] 7 Overload early warning [OL1] 10 Ready output [RDY]

Output frequency Set frequency

Hysteresis width

Operation level

Release level

Frequency detection signal (terminals Y1 to Y5)

5-25

Time

E33

OL function signal (mode select)

XSelect one of the following two types of overload early warning: early warning by electronic thermal O/L relay function or early warning by output current. E 3 3 O L W A R N I N G Set value 0: Electronic thermal O/L relay 1: Output current Set Function Description value Electronic 0 Overload early warning by electronic thermal thermal O/L relay (having inverse-time O/L relay characteristics) to output current. The operation selection and thermal time constant for the inverse-time characteristics are the same as those of the electronic thermal O/L relay for motor protection (F10 and F12). Output 1 An overload early warning is issued current when output current exceeds the set current value for the set time. The figure of OL2(E37) is refferred. XThis function cannot be used when Motor 2 is selected. E34

4 O L 1

L E V E L

Setting range G11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 200%) P11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 150%) The operation release level is 90% of the set value.

XThis function cannot be used when Motor 2 is selected. E35

OL function signal

(Timer)

E 3 5 O L 1 T I M E R XThis function is used when 1 (output current) is set to "E33 Overload early warning (operation selection)." Setting range: 0.1 to 60.0 seconds XSet the time from when the operation level is attained until the overload early warning function is activated. E36

(E34 OL1 LEVEL)

E37

E41

Display coefficient B

XLoad and line speed Use the display coefficient A. Displayed value = output frequency x (0.01 to 200.00) Although the setting range is ±999.00, the effective value range of display data is 0.01 to 200.00. Therefore, values smaller or larger than this range are limited to a minimum value of 0.01 or a maximum value of 200.00. XTarget value and feedback amount of PID controller Set the maximum value of display data in E40, "Display coefficient A," and the minimum value in E41, "Display coefficient B." Displayed value = (target value or feedback amount) x (display coefficient A - B)+B Displayed value A

6 F D T 2 L E V E L : G11S: 0 to 400 Hz P11S: 0 to 120 Hz

OL2 function (Level)

7 O L 2

Display coefficient A

E 4 0 C O E F A E 4 1 C O E F B Setting range Display coefficient A:-999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00 Display coefficient B:-999.00 to 0.00 to +999.00

XThis function determines the operation level of the output current for “2nd OL level detection [OL2]”. E 3

E40

XThese coefficients are conversion coefficients which are used to determine the load and line speed and the target value and feedback amount (process amount) of the PID controller displayed on the LED monitor.

XThis function determines the operation (detection) level of output frequency for “2nd Freq. level detection [FDT2]”. The hysteresis width for operation release is set by the function E32: FDT1 function signal (Hysteresis). E 3

ＯＮ

[OL2]

FDT2 function (Level)

Setting range(Operation level)

OL2 LEVEL x 90% (OL1 LEVEL x 90% ) E35 OL TIMER

OL function signal (Level)

XThis function determines the operation level of the electronic thermal O/L relay or output current. E 3

Output current E37 OL2 LEVEL

L E V E L

Setting range G11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 200%) P11S:Inverter rated output current x (5 to 150%) The operation release level is 90% of the set value.

5-26

Target value or feedback amount

B 0%

100%

E43 E44

LED monitor (function) LED monitor (display at stop mode)

XThe data during inverter operation, during stopping, at frequency setting, and at PID setting is displayed on the LED. XDisplay during running and stopping During running, the items selected in "E43 LED monitor (display selection)," are displayed. In "E44 LED monitor (display at stopping)," specify whether to display some items out of the set values or whether to display the same items as during running. E 4 E 4 Value set to E43 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

3 L E D 4 L E D

M N M N

T R T R 2

E44＝0 At stopping

E44＝1 During At During running stopping running Set frequency value Output frequency (Hz) (before slip compensation) (Hz) Set frequency value Output frequency (Hz) (after slip compensation) (Hz) Set frequency value (Hz) Output current (A) Output voltage (command value) (V) Synchronous speed Synchronous speed (r/min) set value (r/min) Line speed set Line speed (m/min.) value (m/min.) Load speed set Load speed (r/min) value (r/min) Calculated torque value (%) Output power (HP) PID target value 1 (direct input from keypad panel) PID target value 2 (input from "F02 Frequency 1") PID feedback amount

Note: For the values 10 to 12 set to E43, the data is displayed only when selected in "H20 PID control (operation selection)." XDisplay at frequency setting When a set frequency is checked or changed by the keypad panel, the set value shown below is displayed. Select the display item by using "E43 LED monitor (display selection)." This display is not affected by "E44 LED monitor (display at stopping)." Value set to Frequency setting E43 0,1,2,3,4 Set value of frequency (Hz) 5 Set value of synchronous speed (r/min) 6 Set value of line speed (m/min.) 7 Set value of load speed (r/min) 8,9 Set value of frequency (Hz) 10,11,12 Set value of frequency (Hz) Note: For the values 10 to 12 set to E43, the data is displayed only when selected in "H20 PID control (operation selection)."

LCD monitor (function)

E45

XThis function selects the item to be displayed on the LCD monitor in the operation mode. E 4

5 L C D

Set value

Display item

0 1

Operation status, rotating direction, operation guide Output frequency (before slip compensation), output current, calculated torque value in bar graph

Set value: 0 During running

When stopping

60.00

RUN FWD PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

STOP PRG⇒PRG MENU F/D⇒LED SHIFT

Set value: 1

60.00 Hz A % Fout/Iout/TRQ Full-scale value of bar graph Display item Full-scale Output frequency Maximum frequency Output current 200% of inverter rated value Calculated torque value 200% of motor rated value Note: The scale cannot be adjusted. Language

E46

XThis function selects the language for data display on the LCD monitor. E 4 6 L A N G U A G E Set value

Language Set value Language displayed displayed 0 Japanese 3 French 1 English 4 Spanish 2 German 5 Italian Note: English language is used for all LCD screens in this manual. For other languages, refer to the relevant instruction manual. LCD monitor (contrast)

E47

XThis function adjusts the LCD contrast. Increase the set value to raise contrast and decrease to lower contrast. E 4

7 C O N T R A S T

Set value Screen

5-27

0,1,2 • • • • • • 8,9,10 Low High

C：Control Functions of Frequency Internal set frequency (Hz)

C01

Jump frequency 1

C02

Jump frequency 2

C03

Jump frequency 3

C04

Jump frequency (Hysteresis)

Actual jump width Jump frequency width

Jump frequency 2

XThis function makes the set frequency jump so that the inverter's output frequency does not match the mechanical resonance point of the load. XUp to three jump points can be set. XThis function is ineffective when jump frequencies 1 to 3 are set to 0Hz. XA jump does not occur during acceleration or deceleration. When a jump frequency setting range overlaps another range, both ranges are added to determine the actual jump area.

Jump frequency 1

Set frequency (Hz)

～

Multistep frequency 1

C19

Multistep frequency 15

～

C05

XMultistep frequencies 1 to 15 can be switched by turning on and off terminal functions SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8. (See E01 to E09 for terminal function definitions.) XOFF input is assumed for any undefined terminal of SS1, SS2, SS4, and SS8.

C 0 1 J U M P C 0 2 J U M P C 0 3 J U M P Setting range G11S : 0 to 400Hz P11S : 0 to 120Hz In 1Hz steps (min.)

H z H z H z

1 2 3

C 0 4 J U M P Setting range 0 to 30Hz In 1Hz steps (min.)

H Y S T R

To avoid the resonance of the motor driving frequency to the peculiar vibration frequency of the machine, the jump frequency band can be set to the output frequency up to three point. XDuring accelerating, an internal set frequency is kept constant by the lower frequency of the jump frequency band when a set frequency enters the jump frequency band. This means that the output frequency is kept constant according to an internal set frequency. When a set frequency exceeds the upper bound of the jump frequency band, an internal set frequency reaches the value of a set frequency. The output frequency accelerates up to a set frequency while passing the jump frequency band according to the acceleration time at this time. During decelerating, it has a relation opposite to accelerating. Refer to figure below. XWhen two jump frequency bands or more come in succession mutually, the lowest and highest frequency become the lower bound and the upper bound frequency of an actual jump frequency band respectively among them. Refer to upper right figure.

C 0 5 M U L T C 0 6 M U L T C 0 7 M U L T C 0 8 M U L T C 0 9 M U L T C 1 0 M U L T C 1 1 M U L T C 1 2 M U L T C 1 3 M U L T C 1 4 M U L T C 1 5 M U L T C 1 6 M U L T C 1 7 M U L T C 1 8 M U L T C 1 9 M U L T Setting range G11S: 0.00 to 400.00Hz P11S: 0.00 to 120.00Hz In 0.01Hz steps (min.)

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Output frequency (Hz)

H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H

z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z

C13 C12

C14

C11

C15

C10

C16

C09

C17

C08

C18

C07

Internal set frequency (Hz)

1 Related functions E01 to E09 2 (Set value:0 to 3) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5

1 1 1 1 1 1

C19

C06 C05

Jump frequency width

FWD-P24

Jump frequency width Jump frequency width

Jump frequency 3

SS1-P24

SS2-P24

Jump frequency 2

SS4-P24

Jump frequency 1

SS8-P24 Set frequency (Hz)

5-28

frequency

XThis function sets the frequency for jogging operation of motor, which is different from the normal operation. C 2 0 J O G H z Setting range G11S : 0.00 to 400.00 Hz P11S : 0.00 to 120.00 Hz XStarting with the jogging frequency is combined with jogging select signal input from the keypad panel or control terminal. For details, see the explanations of "E01 Terminal X1" to "E09 Terminal X9." C21

Pattern operation (mode select)

XPattern operation is an automatic operation according to preset operation time, direction of rotation, acceleration and deceleration time, and frequency. When using this function, set 10 (pattern operation) to "F01 Frequency setting." The following operation patterns can be selected. Related functions C 2 1 P A T T E R N F01, C30 (Set value:10) Set value 0 1

Operation pattern Perform a pattern operation cycle, then stop operation. Perform pattern operation repeatedly. Stop operation using a stop command. Perform a pattern operation cycle, then continue operation with the last frequency set.

Set value:0

Output frequency

Pattern operation (stage 1)

C28

Pattern operation (stage 7)

XSeven stages are operated in order (of function codes) according to the values set in "C22 Pattern operation (stage 1)" to "C28 Pattern operation (stage 7)." Each function sets the operation time and the rotating direction for each stage and assigns set values of the acceleration and deceleration time. C 2 2 S T A G E 1 C 2 3 S T A G E 2 C 2 4 S T A G E 3 C 2 5 S T A G E 4 C 2 6 S T A G E 5 C 2 7 S T A G E 6 C 2 8 S T A G E 7 Set or assign item Operation time Rotation direction Acceleration and deceleration time

Value range

0．00 to 6000s F: Forward (counterclockwise) R: Reverse (clockwise) 1: Acceleration time 1 (F07), deceleration time 1 (F08) 2: Acceleration time 2 (E10), deceleration time 2 (E11) 3: Acceleration time 3 (E12), deceleration time 3 (E13) 4: Acceleration time 4 (E14), deceleration time 4 (E15) Note: The operation time is represented by the three most significant digits, hence, can be set with only three high-order digits.

End of a cycle

X Setting example 100 F 3

FWD

Forward

C22

～

JOG

～

C20

Acceleration and deceleration time (code): 3

Time

Reverse

Motor rotating direction: Forward (counterclockwise)

Set value:1

End of a cycle FWD

Forward

Operation time: Output frequency

Time

Reverse

Set value:2

Output frequency

End of a cycle FWD

Forward

100s

Set the operation time to 0.00 for stages not used, which are skipped in operation. With regard to the set frequency value, the multistep frequency function is assigned as listed in the table below. Set frequencies to "C05 Multistep frequency 1," to "C11 Multistep frequency 7." Stage No. Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 Stage 4 Stage 5 Stage 6 Stage 7

Time

Reverse

5-29

Operation frequency to be set Multistep frequency 1 (C05) Multistep frequency 2 (C06) Multistep frequency 3 (C07) Multistep frequency 4 (C08) Multistep frequency 5 (C09) Multistep frequency 6 (C10) Multistep frequency 7 (C11)

XPattern operation setting example Set value Operation frequency to be set Function C21 (operation selection) 1 C22 (stage 1) 60.0F2 Multistep frequency 1 (C05) C23 (stage 2) 100F1 Multistep frequency 2 (C06) C24 (stage 3) 65.5R4 Multistep frequency 3 (C07) C25 (stage 4) 55.0R3 Multistep frequency 4 (C08) C26 (stage 5) 50.0F2 Multistep frequency 5 (C09) C27 (stage 6) 72.0F4 Multistep frequency 6 (C10) C28 (stage 7) 35.0F2 Multistep frequency 7 (C11) The following diagram shows this operation.

Output frequency(motor speed)

ACC1 ACC2

ACC2 DEC4

ACC4

ACC3

Multistep frequency 3

Reverse 60.0S direction

100S

C 3

DEC2

Frequency command 2

0 F R E Q

C M D

For the setting method, see the explanation for F01.

Multistep frequency 7 (Stage 7)

Forward Multistep Multistep direction frequency 6 frequency 2 Multistep ACC4 frequency 1 Multistep (Stage 1) frequency 5 FWD

C30

XThis function selects the frequency setting method. Related functions E01 to E09 (Set value:11) F01

C31

Bias

(terminal[12])

C32

Gain

(terminal[12])

XThis function sets the Gain and Bias of the analog input (terminals [12] ).

DEC1

C 3 C 3

1 B I A S 2 G A I N

1 1

2 2

The setting range : DEC2

Time

Multistep frequency 4

BIAS: -100 to +100% GAIN:0.0 to 200%

Terminal 12

Gain

Reference voltage

Bias

65.5S 55.0S 50.0S 72.0S 35.0S Output value of Gain 12

Set value :16 Set value :17

0.1S

200%

Output signals from terminals Y1 to Y5

100% +10V

0.1S

50%

XRunning and stopping are controlled by pressing the FWD and STOP keys and by opening and closing the control terminals. When using the keypad panel, pressing the FWD key starts operation. Pressing the STOP key pauses stage advance. Pressing the FWD key again restarts operation from the stop point according to the stages. If an alarm stop occurs, press the RESET key to release operation of the inverter protective function, then press the FWD key to restart stage advance. If required to start operation from the first stage "C22 Pattern operation (stage 1)," enter a stop command and press the RESET key. If an alarm stop occurs, press the RESET key to release the protective function, then press the key again. Notes: 1. The direction of rotation cannot be reversed by a command issued from the REV key on the keypad panel or terminal [REV]. Any reverse rotation commands entered are canceled. Select forward or reverse rotation by the data in each stage. When the control terminals are used for operation, the self-hold function of operation command also does not work. Select an alternate type switch when using. 2. At the end of a cycle, the motor decelerates-to-stop according to the value set to "F08 Deceleration time 1."

5-30

-10

+10[V] Analog input voltage [terminal 12]

-10V

Output value of Bias 12 Bias setting (when positive) +10V (+100%)

-10

+10[V] Output value of Gain 12 Bias setting (when negative)

-10V (-100%)

C33

Analog setting signal filter

XAnalog signals input from control terminal 12 or C1 may contain noise, which renders control unstable. This function adjusts the time constant of the input filter to remove the effects of noise. C 3 3 R E F F I L T E R Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00 seconds XAn set value too large delays control response though stabilizing control. A set value too small speeds up control response but renders control unstable. If the optimum value is not known, change the setting when control is unstable or response is delayed. Note: The set value is commonly applied to terminals 12 and C1. For input of PID feedback amount, the PID control feedback filter (set in H25) is used.

5-31

Motor 1 (P: Motor Parameters) P01

Number of motor 1 poles

XThis function sets the number of poles of motor 1 to be driven. If this setting is not made, an incorrect motor speed (synchronous speed) is displayed on the LED. P 0 1 M 1 P O L E S Set values: 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14 P02 Motor 1 (capacity) XThe nominal applied motor capacity is set at the factory. The setting should be changed when driving a motor with a different capacity. P 0 2 M 1 - C A P Set value for models with nominal applied motor of 30HP or less : 0.01 to 60HP Models with nominal applied motor of 40HP or more : 0.01 to 800HP XSet the nominal applied motor capacity listed in 9-1, "Standard Specifications." Also set a value in the range from two ranks lower to one rank higher than the nominal applied motor capacity. When a value outside this range is set, accurate control cannot be guaranteed. If a value between two nominal applied motor capacities is set, data for the lower capacity is automatically written for related function data. X When the setting of this function is changed, the values of the following related functions are automatically set to data of the FUJI 3-phase standard motor. -- P03 Motor 1 (rated current) -- P06 Motor 1 (no-load current) -- P07 Motor 1 (% R1) -- P08 Motor 1 (% X1) Note: The set values for the FUJI 3-phase standard motor are 230V, 50Hz, 4 poles for the 230V series; 460V, 50Hz, 4 poles for the 460V series. P03 Motor 1 (rated current) XThis function sets the rated current value of motor 1. P 0 3 M 1 - I r Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000A P04

Motor 1 (Tuning)

XThis function measures and automatically writes motor data. P 0

4 M 1

T U N 1

Set value 0 1

Operation

Inactive Measure the primary resistance (%R1) of the motor and leakage reactance (%X) of the base frequency when the motor is stopping and automatically write both values in P07 and P08. Measure the primary resistance (%R1) of the 2 motor and leakage reactance (%X) of the base frequency when the motor is stopping, measure the no-load current (lo) when the motor is running, and automatically write these values in P06, P07, and P08. Put the motor into the state unit separating from the machine for the tuning of the no-load current. In the state that the load is connected, cannot the tuning correctly. Execute the auto tuning of set value “1" after obtaining the test report etc. from the motor manufactures when not making it in the state of the motor unit, and setting P06 (no-load current) beforehand. XPerform auto tuning when data written beforehand in "P06 No-load current," "P07 %R1," and "P08 %X," differs from actual motor data. Typical cases are listed below. Auto tuning improves control and calculation accuracy. ・When a motor other than the FUJI standard 3-phase motor is used and accurate data is required for close control. ・When output-side impedance cannot be ignored as when cable between the inverter and the motor is too long or when a reactor is connected. ・ When %R1 or %X is unknown as when a non-standard or special motor is used.

Tuning procedure 1. Adjust the voltage and frequency according to motor characteristics. Adjust functions "F03 Maximum output frequency," "F04 Base frequency," "F05 Rated voltage," and "F06 Maximum output voltage." 2. Enter untunable motor constants first. Set functions "P02 Capacity," "P03 Rated current," and "P06 No-load current," (input of no-load current not required when P04=2, for running the motor at tuning, is selected). 3. When tuning the no-load current, beware of motor rotation. 4. Set 1 (motor stop) or 2 (motor rotation) to function "P04 FUNC Auto tuning." Press the DATA key to write the set value and press the FWD key or REV key then start tuning simultaneously. 5. Tuning takes several seconds to several tens of seconds (when 2 is set. As the motor accelerates up to half the base frequency according to acceleration time, is tuned for the no-load current, and decelerates according to the deceleration time, the total tuning time varies depending on set acceleration and deceleration times.) 6. Press the STOP key after the tuning is completed . 7. End of procedure.

5-32

Note1: If REMOTE operation(F02: 1) is selected, operation signal is given from terminal [FWD] or [REV]. Note2: Use function "A13 Motor 2 (auto tuning)," to tune motor 2. In this case, set values described in 1 and 2 above are for the function (A01 - ) of motor 2.

WARNING

When the auto tuning value is set to 2, the motor rotates at a maximum of half the base frequency. Beware of motor rotation. as injury may result.

P05 Motor 1 (On-line Tuning) XLong-time operation affects motor temperature and motor speed. Online tuning minimizes speed changes when motor temperature changes. XAuto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function. P 0

5 M 1

T U N 2

Set value 0 1 P06

P09

P 0 9 S L I P C O M P 1 XAuto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function. Set value: 0.00 to 15.00Hz XCalculate the amount of slip compensation using the following formula: Slip compenssation amount

Motor 1 (no-load current)

XThis function sets the no-load current (exciting current) of motor 1. P 0 6 M 1 － I O Setting range: 0.00 to 2,000A Motor 1 (%R1 setting)

P08

Motor 1 (%X setting)

XWrite this data when using a motor other than the FUJI standard 3-phase motor and when the motor constant and the impedance between the inverter and motor are known. P 0 P 0

7 M 1 － % R 1 8 M 1 － % X

XCalculate %R1 using the following formula:

%R1=

R1＋Cable R

(

)

×100［%］

V/ 3・I

R1 : Primary coil resistance value of the motor [Ω] Cable R : Output-side cable resistance value [Ω] V : Rated voltage [V] Ｉ: Motor rated current [A] XCalculate %X using the following formula: %X =

X1＋X2・XM/

(X2＋XM ) + Cable

(

3・I

)

Slippage［r/min］

［Hz］ Synchronous speed［r/min］ Slippage = Synchronous speed - Rated speed ＝Base frequency ×

Operation Inactive Active

P07

Slip compensation control

XChanges in load torque affect motor slippage, thus causing variations in motor speed. The slip compensation control adds a frequency (proportional to motor torque) to the inverter output frequency to minimize variations in motor speed due to torque changes.

× 100［%］

X1 : Primary leakage reactance of the motor [Ω] X2 : Secondary leakage reactance (converted to a primary value)of the motor [Ω] XM : Exciting reactance of the motor [Ω] Cable X : Output-side cable reactance [Ω] V : Rated voltage [V] I : Motor rated current[A] Note: For reactance, use a value in the data written in "F04 Base frequency 1." XWhen connecting a reactor or filter to the output circuit, add its value. Use value 0 for cable values that can be ignored.

5-33

High Performance functions (H:High Performance function) H03

W hen retry succeeded

Data initializing

XThis function returns all function data changed by the customer to the factory setting data. (initialization). H 0 3 D A T A I N I T Set value 0： Disabled. 1： Initializing data. STOP XTo perform initialization, press the and ∧ keys FUNC together to set 1, then press the DATA key. The set values of all functions are initialized. The set value in H03 automatically returns to 0 following the end of initialization. H04 Auto-reset(Times) H05 Auto-reset (Reset interval) XWhen the inverter protective function which invokes the retry operation is activated, this function releases operation of the protective function and restarts operation without issuing an alarm or terminating output. H 0 4 A U T O - R E S E T H 0 5 R E S E T I N T Set the protective function release count and waiting time from its operation startup to release. Setting range (Count) : 0, 1 to 10 (Waiting time) : 2 to 20 seconds To not use the retry function, set 0 to "H04 Retry (count)." XInverter protective functions that can invoke retry function. OC1,OC2,OC3 dBH : Overcurrent : Braking resistor overheating OV1,OV2,OV3 OL1 : Overvoltage : Motor 1 overload OH1 OL2 : Heat sink overheating : Motor 2 overload OH3 OLU : Inverter inside overheating : Inverter overload XWhen the value of "H04 Retry (count)," is set from 1 to 10, an inverter run command is immediately entered following the wait time set in H05, "Retry (wait time)," and the startup of the retry operation. If the cause of the alarm has been removed at this time, the inverter starts without switching to alarm mode. If the cause of the alarm still remains, the protective function is reactivated according to the wait time set in "H05 Retry (waiting time)." This operation is repeated until the cause of the alarm is removed. The restart operation switches to alarm mode when the retry count exceeds the value set in "H04 Retry (count)." The operation of the retry function can be monitored from terminals Y1 to Y5. When the retry function is selected, operation automatically restarts depending on the cause of the trip stop. (The WARNING machine should be designed to ensure safety during a restart) as accident may result.

O ccurrence Extinction Alarm Automatic release command of protective function

Time 0.1S W aiting time (H05) Restart 5min. after constant speed

O utput frequency O utput signals terminals Y1 to Y5

RESET the times of auto-reset

retry failed Extinction

O ccurrence

Alarm reset

Alarm

Automatic release command of protective function O utput frequency O utput signals terminals Y1 to Y5

H06

0.1S H05: W ait time

0.1S H05: W ait time First

0.1S Retry end

Second

Count set in H04 (count)

Fan stop operation

XThis function specifies whether cooling fan ON/OFF control is automatic. While power is applied to the inverter, the automatic fan control detects the temperature of the cooling fan in the inverter and turns the fan on or off. When this control is not selected, the cooling fan rotates continually. H 0 6 F A N S T O P Set value 0: ON/OFF control disabled. 1: ON/OFF control enabled. The cooling fan operating status can be monitored from terminals Y1 to Y5.

5-34

H07 ACC/DEC （Mode select） pattern XThis function selects the acceleration and deceleration pattern. H 0

7 A C C

Set value 0: 1: 2: 3:

Output frequency Acceleration time

P T N

Inactive (linear acceleration and deceleration) S-shape acceleration and deceleration (mild) S-shape acceleration and deceleration (*) Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration

Base frequency

Related functions U02 to U05

H08 * The S-shape range is set by the function: U02 to U05 when the set value "2" is selected. The detail is referred to the function: U02 to U05. [S-shape acceleration and deceleration] This pattern reduces shock by mitigating output frequency changes at the beginning/end of acceleration and deceleration. Output frequency f[Hz]

Mild S-shape ern Arbitrary S-shape α

Deceleration time

Maximum output frequency Set frequency

t[sec]

Rev. phase sequence lock

XWhen accidental reversing is expected to cause a malfunction, this function can be set to prevent reversal. H 0 8 R E V L O C K Set value 0: Inactive 1: Active When reversible operation with polarity(set value: "4" or "5") is selected in frequency command: F01, C30, the inverter operates as follows. 0V to 10V input -10V to 0V input Operation command Short FWD-CM The inverter operates. The frequency display terminals or is "0.00" Hz. FWD : ON Short REV-CM terminals or REV : ON

The frequency display is "0.00" Hz.

The inverter operates.

α 0

βacc

βdec

t[s]

<Pattern constants> When 1 is selected in H07 (mild S-shape pattern) Range of S-shape(α) Time for S-shape at acceleration (β acc) Time for S-shape at deceleration (β dec)

0.05 x max. output freq. (Hz)

When 2 is selected in H07 (arbitrary S-shape pattern) (U02 to U05) x max. output freq. (Hz)

0.10 x acceleration time (s)

(U02, U03) x2 x acceleration time (s)

0.10 x deceleration time (s)

U04, U05 x2 x deceleration time (s)

This function prevents a reversing operation resulting from a connection between the REV and P24 terminals, inadvertent activation of the REV key, or negative analog input from terminal 12 or V1. During this function is operating, "0.00Hz" is displayed on the LED monitor. This function cannot be prevented against H18: Torque control function. It may be reverse because of the torque signal and load.

∗ When acceleration and deceleration times are very long or short, acceleration and deceleration are rendered linear. It may be switched the acceleration and deceleration time during constant speed or stopping by the function "acceleration and deceleration time selection"(E01 to E09: 4, 5). The signal may be ignored switched during S-shape at acceleration. The linear deceleration time is corresponded if switched during S-shape at deceleration. It may be switched to the S-shape operation if output frequency is reached to the setting frequency or change to acceleration control. [ Curvilinear acceleration and deceleration ] This function is used to minimize motor acceleration and deceleration times in the range that includes a constant-output range.

5-35

H09

H10

Start mode

This function smoothly starts the motor which is coasting after a momentary power failure or after the motor has been subject to external force, without stopping motor. At startup, this function detects the motor speed and outputs the corresponding frequency, thereby enabling a shock-free motor startup. Although the normal startup method is used, when the coasting speed of the motor is 120 Hz or more as an inverter frequency, when the value set to "F03 Maximum frequency," exceeds the value set to "F15 Frequency limiter (upper limit)." and when the coasting speed is less than 5 Hz as an inverter frequency. H 0 9 S T A R T M O D E Set value 0,1,2 Set value STM Restart after a Other momentary power operation failure or Line-to-inverter switching 0 OFF / Inactive not selected (normal starting) 1 Active Inactive (smoothly starting) Active 2 any value ON Active STM: Start characteristics selection signal(E01 to E09: 26) NOTE: -1: Automatically restart when overcurrent or overvoltage is detected during smoothly starts. -2: The coasting speed is used 100 Hz or less as an inverter frequency. -3: When H09:2 or STM:ON, it needs the time more than normal start even the motor is STOP because the motor speed is detected on ALL situation. And it may be rotated the motor when the load is too small. -4: Auto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function. -5: When the used motor slippage is too differ from FUJI motor, the "Slip compensation control (P09, A18)" should be set. The characteristics may not be satisfied. XWhen the operation above is to be problem, this function is not used (inactive). XThis function may not be satisfied the characteristics because of the load condition, motor constant, operating frequency, coasting speed, wire length, momentary power failure time or external factor. P24

0.1 s or longer

0.2 s or longer

STM

Time

ON FWD ON

Output frequency (motor speed)

Time Speed search

Acceleration

Energy-saving operation

XWhen the output frequency is fixed (constant-speed operation) at light loads and except forâ&#x20AC;?0.0â&#x20AC;? is set to F09, "Torque boost 1," this function automatically reduces the output voltage, while minimizing the product (power) of voltage and current. XAuto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function. XThe energy-saving operation does not be operated when set below. - Under Torque control - Selected the Automatic torque boost - Selected the Torque vector control - Under PG vector control H 1 0 E N E R G Y S A V Set value 0: Inactive 1: Active Note: -Use this function for square law reduction torque loads (e.g., fans, pumps). When used for a constant-torque load or rapidly changing load, this function causes a delay in control response. -The energy-saving operation automatically stops during acceleration and deceleration and when the torque limiting function is activated. H11

DEC mode

XThis function selects the inverter stopping method when a stop command is entered. H 1 1 D E C M O D E Set value 0: Deceleration-to-stop based on data set to "H07 Non-linear acceleration and deceleration" 1: Coasting-to-stop Note: This function is effective only when a stop command is entered and, therefore, is ineffective when the motor is stopped by lowering the set frequency. H12

Instantaneous overcurrent limiting

XAn overcurrent trip generally occurs when current flows above the inverter protective level following a rapid change in motor load. The instantaneous overcurrent limiting function controls inverter output and prohibits the flow of a current exceeding the protective level even when the load changes. XAs the operation level of the instantaneous overcurrent limiting function cannot be adjusted, the torque limiting function must be used. As motor generation torque may be reduced when instantaneous overcurrent limiting is applied, set this function to be inactive for equipment such as elevators, which are adversely affected by reduced motor WARNING generation torque, in which case an overcurrent trip occurs when the current flow exceeds the inverter protective level. A mechanical brake should be used to ensure safety. as accident may result. H 1

In this section, the output voltage is gradually increased in steps to minimize shock.

Set value

Note: The dotted-dashed line indicates motor speed.

5-36

N S T

0: Inactive 1: Active

C L

H13

Auto-restart (Restart time)

XInstantaneous switching to another power line (when the power of an operating motor is cut off or power failure occurs) creates a large phase difference between the line voltage and the voltage remaining in the motor, which may cause electrical or mechanical failure. To rapidly switch power lines, write the remaining voltage attenuation time to wait for the voltage remaining in the motor to attenuate. This function operates at restart after a momentary power failure. H 1 3 R E S T A R T T Setting range: 0.1 to 5.0 seconds XWhen the momentary power failure time is shorter than the wait time value, a restart occurs following the wait time. When the power failure time is longer than the wait time value, a restart occurs when the inverter is ready to operate (after about 0.2 to 0.5 second). Auto-restart (Freq. fall rate) H14 XThis function determines the reduction rate of the output frequency for synchronizing the inverter output frequency and the motor speed. This function is also used to reduce the frequency and thereby prevent stalling under a heavy load during normal operation. H 1 4 F A L L R A T E Setting range: 0.00, 0.01 to 100.00 Hz/s XWhen 0.00 is set, the frequency is reduced according to the set deceleration time. Note: A too large frequency reduction rate is may temporarily increase the regeneration energy from the load and invoke the overvoltage protective function. Conversely, a rate that is too small extends the operation time of the current limiting function and may invoke the inverter overload protective function. H15

Auto-restart

(Holding DC voltage)

XThis function is for when 2 (deceleration-to-stop at power failure) or 3 (operation continuation) is set to "F14 Restart after momentary power failure (operation selection)." Either function starts a control operation if the main circuit DC voltage drops below the set operation continuation level. H 1 5 H O L D V Setting range 230 V series: 200 to 300V 460 V series: 400 to 600V XWhen power supply voltage to the inverter is high, control can be stabilized even under an excessive load by raising the operation continuation level. However, when the level is too high, this function activates during normal operation and causes unexpected motion. Please contact Fuji electric when changing the initial value. H16 Auto-restart (OPR command selfhold time) XAs the power to an external operation circuit (relay sequence) and the main power to the inverter is generally cut off at a power failure, the operation command issued to the inverter is also cut off. This function sets the time an operation command is to be held in the inverter. If a power failure lasts beyond the self-hold time, power-off is assumed, automatic restart mode is released, and the inverter starts operation at normal mode when power is applied again. (This time can be considered the allowable power failure time.) H 1 6 S E L F H O L D T Setting range: 0.0 to 30.0 seconds, 999 When "999" is set, an operation command is held (i.e., considered a momentary power failure) while control power in the inverter is being established or until the main circuit DC voltage is about 100Vdc.

H18

Torque control

XThis function controls motor torque according to a command value. Related functions E01toE09 H 1 8 T R Q C T R L (Set value: 23) Set value 0 1

Operation Inactive (Operation by frequency command) Torque control active 0 to +10V analog voltage input to terminal 12 and the direction of rotation (FWD or REV) is used for the torque command value. 0 is used for 0 to -10V. Torque control active -10 to +10V analog voltage input to terminal 12 and the direction of rotation (FWD or REV) is used for the torque command value. T o rq u e c o n tro l b lo c k d ia g ra m T o rq u e c o m m a n d v a lu e

V o lta g e a t te rm in a l 1 2

F o rw a rd c o m m a n d R e v e rs e c o m m a n d

T o rq u e lim ita tio n

+ -

R e g u la to r

O u tp u t fre q u e n c y

D e te c te d to rq u e c u rre n t

The torque command value is +200% when the voltage at terminal 12 is +10V and is -200% when the voltage is -10V. XAuto tuning(P04/A13: 2) should be done to use this function. XIn torque control, the torque command value and motor load determine the speed and direction of rotation. XWhen the torque is controlled, the upper limit of frequency refers to the minimum value among the maximum frequency , the frequency limiter (upper limiter) value, and 120 Hz. Maintain the frequency at least one-tenth of the base frequency because torque control performance deteriorates at lower frequencies. XIf the operation command goes off during a torque control operation, the operation is switched to speed control and the motor decelerates-to-stop. At this time, the torque control function does not operate. XThis function cannot be used when the motor 2 is selected. XThis function cannot be used for FRN-P11S. The malfunction may be occurred when the set torque is mistaken. (up WARNING to upper frequency, maximum frequency or 120Hz) as accident may result. H19

Active drive

XThis function automatically extends accelerating time against acceleration operation of 60 seconds or longer to prevent an inverter trip resulting from a temperature rise in inverter due to overcurrent. H 1 9 A U T R E D Set value 0: Inactive 1: Active (When the active drive function is activated, acceleration time is three times the selected time.)

5-37

the

PID control (Mode select)

H25

PID control(Feedback filter)

H21

ď˝&#x17E;

H20

XPID control detects the amount of control (feedback amount) from a sensor of the control target, then compares it with the target value (e.g., reference temperature). If the values differ, this function performs a control to eliminate the deviation. In other words, this control matches the feedback amount with the target value. This function can be used for flow control, pressure control, temperature control, and other process controls. Target value

+ -

Drive section

Control target

I D

PID control (Feedback signal)

This function selects the feedback amount input terminal and electrical specifications of the terminal. Select a value from the table below according to sensor specifications. H 2 Set value 0 1 2 3

1 F B

G N A L

Descriptions Control terminal 12, forward operation (0 to 10V voltage input) Control terminal C1, forward operation (4 to 20mA current input) Control terminal 12, reverse operation (10 to 0V voltage input) Control terminal C1, reverse operation (20 to 4mA current input) Feedback amount

Feedback amount

XForward or reverse operations can be selected for PID controller output. This enables motor revolutions to be faster or lower according to PID controller output XThis function cannot be used when the motor 2 is selected. H 2 0 P I D M O D E Set value 0: No operation 1: Forward operation 2: Reverse operation Inverter output frequency Maximum frequency

R op ever er se ati on

0 PID output

100%

XThe target value can be entered using F01, "Frequency setting 1," or directly from the keypad panel. Select any terminal of Terminals X1 (E01) to X9 (E09) and set value 11 (frequency setting switching). For entry from F01, "Frequency setting 1," input an OFF signal to the selected terminal. For direct entry from the keypad panel, turn on the selected terminal. XFor the target value and feedback amount, the process amount can be displayed according to the values set in E40, "Display coefficient A," and E41, "Display coefficient B." Display Display coefficient A

Display coefficient B

rw Fo

pe do ar

n tio ra

R op ever er se ati on

0% 0V 4mA

Input

10V 20mA

Only positive values can be input for this feedback amount of PID control. Negative values (e.g., 0 to -10V, -10 to 0V) cannot be input, thereby the function cannot be used for a reverse operation by an analog signal.

d ar rw on Fo rati e op

100%

Target value or 100% feedback amount

5-38

H23

PID control (I-gain)

H24

PID control (D-gain)

XThese functions are not generally used alone but are combined like P control, PI control, PD control, and PID control. XP operation Operation using an operation amount (output frequency) proportional to deviation is called P operation, which outputs an operation amount proportional to deviation, though it cannot eliminate deviation alone.

XD operation An operation where the operation amount (output frequency) is proportional to the deviation differential is called a D operation, which outputs an operation amount as the deviation differential and, therefore, is capable of responding to sudden changes.

Deviation

PID control (P-gain)

Time Operation amount

H22

Deviation

Time

Operation amount

H 2 2 P - G A I N Setting range: 0.01 to 10.0 times P (gain) is the parameter that determines the response level for the deviation of P operation. Although an increase in gain speeds up response, an excessive gain causes vibration, and a decrease in gain delays response. The value "1" is the P(gain) that is when the maximum frequency 100% at deviation 100%. Response

Time

Operation Deviation amount

X I operation An operation where the change speed of the operation amount (output frequency) is proportional to the deviation is called an I operation. An I operation outputs an operation amount as the integral of deviation and, therefore, has the effect of matching the control amount (feedback amount) to the target value (e.g., set frequency), though it deteriorates response for significant changes in deviation.

H 2

Time

G A

Setting range: 0.0 (Inactive), 0.1 to 3600 seconds "H23 I-gain" is used as a parameter to determine the effect of I operation. A longer integration time delays response and weakens resistance to external elements. A shorter integration time speeds up response, but an integration time that is too short causes vibration.

H 2 4 D - G A I N Setting range: 0.00 (Inactive), 0.01 to 10.0 seconds "H24 D-gain" is used as a parameter to determine the effect of a D operation. A longer differentiation time causes vibration by P operation quickly attenuating at the occurrence of deviation. Excessive differentiation time could cause vibration. Shortening the differentiation time reduces attenuation at the occurrence of deviation. XPI control P operation alone does not remove deviation completely. P + I control (where I operation is added to P operation) is normally used to remove the remaining deviation. PI control always operates to eliminate deviation even when the target value is changed or there is a constant disturbance. When I operation is strengthened, however, the response for rapidly changing deviation deteriorates. P operation can also be used individually for loads containing an integral element. X PD control If deviation occurs under PD control, an operation amount larger than that of D operation alone occurs rapidly and prevents deviation from expanding. For a small deviation, P operation is restricted. When the load contains an integral element, P operation alone may allow responses to vibrate due to the effect of the integral element, in which case PD control is used to attenuate the vibration of P operation and stabilize responses. In other words, this control is applied to loads in processes without a braking function. XPID control PID control combines the P operation, the I operation which removes deviation, and the D operation which suppresses vibration. This control achieves deviation-free, accurate, and stable responses. XAdjusting PID set value Adjust the PID value while monitoring the response waveform on an oscilloscope or other instrument if possible. Proceed as follows: -Increase the value of "H22 P-gain" without generating vibration. - Decrease the value of "H23 I-gain" without generating vibration. - Increase the value of "H24 D-gain" without generating vibration.

5-39

Response

-To suppress vibration with a frequency roughly equivalent to the value "H24 D-gain," decrease the value of H24. If there is residual vibration with 0.0, decrease the value of "H22 P-gain." Before adjustment

Internal resistance of PTC thermistor Rp2

Rp1

After adjustment

Alarm temperature

Time

H25

The figure in "H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)," shows that resistor 250Ω and the thermistor (resistance value Rp) are connected in parallel. Hence, voltage Vc1 (Level) at terminal [C1] can be calculated by using the following formula.

PID control (Feedback filter)

XThis filter is for feedback signal input from terminal [12] or [C1]. This filter stabilizes operation of the PID control system. A set value that is too large, however, deteriorates response. H 2

5 F B

Setting range: H26

250・Rp 250 + Rp × 10 ［V］ Vc1 = 250・Rp 1000 + 250 + Rp

L T E R

The operation level can be set by bringing Rp in the Vc1 calculation formula into the following range. Rp1 < Rp < Rp2 To obtain Rp easily, use the following formula.

0.0 to 60.0 seconds PTC thermistor (Mode select)

XSet this function active when the motor has a PTC thermistor for overheat protection H 2 6 P T C M O D E Set value 0: Inactive 1: Active XConnect the PTC thermistor as shown in the figure below. Turn on switch “PTC” on the control PCB. The trip mode is activated by “OH2:External thermal relay tripped.”

Rp =

Rp1 + Rp 2 ［Ω］ 2

H28

Droop operation

When two or more motors drive a single machine, a higher load is placed on the motor rotating the fastest. Droop operation achieves a good load balance by applying drooping characteristics to speed against load variations. Auto tuning(P04: 2) should be done to use this function. This function cannot be used when the motor 2 is selected. The drooping speed at constant torque is set.

DC10V

PTC

H 2 8 D R O O P Set value : -9.9Hz to 0.0Hz

OFF

Characteristics of the motor

1k Ohom

C1 PTC thermistor

When droop operation is active

OH2 Comparator

Resistor 250 Ohom

Temperature

Setting value of |H28|

Torque

H27 (Level)

When droop operation is inactive

Rated torque (drive)

Freq. setting

0V 0

H27

Setting value of |H28|

XThe voltage input to terminal [C1] is compared to the set voltage (Level). When the input voltage is equal to or greater than the set voltage (Level), "H26 PTC thermistor (Mode select)," starts. H 2

Speed

PTC thermistor (Level)

7 P T C

L E V E L

Setting range: 0.00 to 5.00V XThe PTC thermistor has its own alarm temperature. The internal resistance value of the thermistor largely change at the alarm temperature. The operation (voltage) level is set using this change in the resistance value.

Rated torque (brake)

Acc/Dec calculation Freq. setting value

Output freq.

H28 Droop freq.

P09 Slip compensation freq.

Feedback amount

5-40

Torque calculation + : drive - : brake

H30 Serial link (Function select) XThe link function (communication function) provides RS-485 (provided as standard) and bus connections (optional). The serial link function includes: 1) Monitoring (data monitoring, function data check) 2) Frequency setting 3) Operation command (FWD, REV, and other commands for digital input) 4)Write function data H 3 0 L I N K F U N C Setting range: 0 to 3 Communication can be enabled and disabled by a digital input. This function sets the serial link function when communication is enabled. Set value Frequency Operation command command 0 Disabled Disabled 1 Enabled Disabled 2 Disabled Enabled 3 Enabled Enabled The data monitoring and function data write functions are always enabled. Disabling communication using digital input brings about the same result as when "0" is set to this function. When the bus option is installed, this setting selects the function of the option and the RS-485 interface is restricted to monitoring and writing function data.

H39

RS-485 (Response interval)

～

RS-485 (Address)

～

H31

These functions set the conditions of RS-485 Modbus-RTU communication. Set the conditions according to the upstream device. Refer to technical manual for the protocol. XThis function sets the station address of RTU. H 3 1 4 8 5 A D R E S S Setting range: 1 to 247 XThis function sets processing at communication error and sets the error processing timer value. H 3 2 M O D E O N E R Setting range: 0 to 3 Set value Processing at communication error 0 Immediate Er 8 trip (forced stop) Continue operation within timer time, Er8 trip 1 after timer time. Continue operation and effect retry within timer time, then invoke an Er8 trip if a 2 communication error occurs. If an error does not occur, continue operation. 3 Continue operation.

XThis function sets data length. H 3 5 L E N G T H Setting range: 0 Set value 0

XThis function sets the parity bit. H 3 6 P A R I T Y Setting range: 0 to 2 Set value 0 1 2

Parity bit None Even Odd

XThis function sets the stop bit. H 3 7 S T O P B I Setting range: 0, 1

T S

Set value Stop bit 0 2 bit 1 1 bit The stop bit is automatically configured by the value of the parity bit. For parity “NONE” the stop bit is 2bits. For parity “EVEN” or “ODD” the stop bit is 1 bit. XIn a system where the local station is always accessed within a specific time, this function detects that access was stopped due to an open-circuit or other fault and invokes an Er 8 trip. H 3 8 N O R E S t Setting range: 0 (No detection) 1 to 60 seconds XThis function sets the time from when a request is issued from the upstream device to when a response is returned. H 3 9 I N T E R V A L Setting range: 0.00 to 1.00 second

H 3 3 T I M E R Setting range: 0.0 to 60.0 seconds XThis function sets the baud rate. H 3 4 B A U D R A T E Setting range: 0 to 3 Set value 0 1 2 3

Data length 8 bit

Baud rate 19200 bit/s 9600 bit/s 4800 bit/s 2400 bit/s

5-41

Motor 2 (A:Altemative Motor Parameters) A01

Maximum frequency2

XThis function sets the maximum frequency for motor 2 output by the inverter. This function operates the same as "F03 Maximum frequency 1." For details, see the explanation for F03. A 0

1 M A X

A02

H z

Base frequency 2

XThis function sets the maximum output frequency in the constant-torque area of motor 2 (i.e., output frequency at rated output voltage). This function operates the same as "F04 Base frequency 1." For details, see the explanation for F04. A 0

2 B A S E

A03

H z

Rated voltage 2

XThis function sets the rated value of voltage output to motor 2. This function operates the same as "F05 Rated voltage 1." For details, see the explanation for F05. A 0 3 R A T E D V 2 A04 Maximum voltage 2 XThis function sets the maximum value of the inverter output voltage of motor 2. This function operates the same as "F06 Maximum voltage 1." For details, see the explanation for F06. A 0 4 M A X V - 2 A05

Torque boost 2

XThis function sets the torque boost function of motor 2. This function operates the same as "F09 Torque boost 1." For details, see the explanation for F09. A 0 A06

5 T R Q

A11 Motor 2 (Capacity) XThis function sets the capacity of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P02 Motor 1 (Capacity)." For details, see the explanation for P02. However, the related motor data functions change to "A12 Motor 2 (Rated current)," "A15 Motor 2 (No-load current)," "A16 Motor 2 (%R1 setting)," and "A17 Motor 2 (%X setting)." A 1 1 M 2 - C A P A12

XThis function sets the rated current of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P03 Motor 1 (Rated current)." For details, see the explanation for P03. A 1 2 M 2 - I r A13 Motor 2 (Tuning) XThis function sets the auto tuning of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P04 Motor 1 (Tuning)." For details, see the explanation for P04. A 1 A14

A08

Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Thermal time constant)

A15

A 1

A09

6 E L C T 7 O L L 8 T I M E

R N O L 2 E V E L 2 C N S T 2

Torque vector control 2

XThis function sets the torque vector function of motor 2. This function operates the same as "F42 Torque vector control 1." For details, see the explanation for F42. A 0 A10

9 T R Q V

U N 1

Motor 2 (On-line tuning)

Motor 2 (No-load current)

5 M 2 -

A16

Motor 2 (%R1 setting)

A17

Motor 2 (%X setting)

XThis function sets %R1 and %X of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P07 Motor 1 (%R1 setting)," and "P08 Motor 1 (%X setting)." For details, see the explanations for P07 and P08.

XThis function sets the function of the electronic thermal overload relay for motor 2. This function operates the same as F10 to F12, "Electronic thermal overload relay 1." For details, see the explanations for F10 to F12. A 0 A 0 A 0

XThis function sets the no-load current of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P06 Motor 1 (No-load current)." For details, see the explanation for P06.

Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Select) Electronic thermal overload relay 2 (Level)

3 M 2

XThis function sets the online tuning of motor 2. This function operates the same as "P05 Motor 1 (On-line tuning)." For details, see the explanation for P05. A 1 4 M 2 T U N 2

B O O S T 2

A07

Motor 2 (Rated current)

E C T O R 2

Number of motor-2 poles

XThis function sets the number of poles of motor 2 to be driven. This function operates the same as "P01 Number of motor-1 poles." For details, see the explanation for P01. A 1 0 M 2 P O L E S

A 1 A 1 A18

6 M 2 7 M 2

- % R 1 - % X

Slip compensation control 2

XThis function sets the amount of slip compensation for motor 2. This function operates the same as "P09 Slip compensation control." For details, see the explanation for P09. A 1 8 S L I P C O M P 2 Set value : 0.00Hz to 15.00Hz XCalculate the amount of slip compensation using the following formula: Slip compenssation amount

= Base frequency ×

Slippage [r / min] ［Hz］ Synchronous speed [r / min]

Slippage = Synchronous speed-Rated speed

5-42

U : User function U01

Maximum compensation frequency during braking torque limit

- At acceleration,

XThis function becomes effective, when the torque limit (brake) is used. The inverter controls to increase the output frequency so that torque calculations do not exceed the torque limit (brake) setting ( F41 or E17). (When F41 or E17 is set to 999, it becomes invalid.) This function sets the increment of upper limit for output frequency. When the regeneration avoidance is selected, the resurrection ability can be improved by raising the increment of upper limit. However, the output frequency of the inverter is limited at the frequency limit(high): F15.

U 0 1 U S E R

| f 1 − f 0 |≥ f max ×

U 02 + U 03 100

or,

- At deceleration,

U 04 + U 05 100 f 1 − f 0 U 02 + U 03 tacc = ( + ) × Ta f max 100 f 1 − f 0 U 04 + U 05 tdec = ( + ) × Td f max 100

| f 1 − f 0 |≥ f max ×

0 1

linear Acceleration and deceleration clause

Setting range : 0 to 65535

S-shape clause

- At acceleration,

The set value "15" becomes 1Hz. (The set value "1" becomes 1/15Hz)

| f 1 − f 0 |< f max ×

U02

1st S-shape level at acceleration (start)

U03

2nd S-shape level at acceleration (stop)

U04

1st S-shape level at deceleration (start)

U05

2nd S-shape level at deceleration (stop)

XWhen "2" is set in the function code: H07, both curvilinear acceleration and deceleration ranges of S-shape can be set up arbitrarily. The range is the ratio for maximum output frequency 1 (F03) or 2 (A01) .

U 02 + U 03 100

or,

- At deceleration,

| f 1 − f 0 |< f max ×

U 04 + U 05 100

⎧ f1− f0 ⎫ ⎛ U 02 + U 03 ⎞ 100 × tacc = 2 × ⎨ ⎟ × Ta ⎬×⎜ + f max U 02 U 03 100 ⎠ ⎩ ⎭ ⎝ ⎧⎪ f 1 − f 0 ⎫⎪ ⎛ U 04 + U 05 ⎞ 100 tdec = 2 × ⎨ × ⎟ × Td ⎬×⎜ f max U 04 + U 05 100 ⎪⎩ ⎪⎭ ⎝ ⎠

U 0 2 U S E R

0 2

U08

Initial value of main DC link capacitor

U 0 3 U S E R

0 3

U09

Measured value of main DC link capacitor

U 0 4 U S E R

0 4

U 0 5 U S E R

0 5

XData for the life expectancy judgment of the capacitor in main circuit is stored in this function. The electrical discharge time of the capacitor can be measured automatically, and the time of part replacement can be confirmed according to the decrement rate from the factory shipment.

Setting range : 1 to 50% Output frequency f[Hz]

0 8

U 0 9 U S E R

0 9

Setting range : 0 to 65535

f1 U03

U04

U02 f0

U 0 8 U S E R

U05

0 tacc

tdec

t[s]

X100% value of this function means maximum frequency (fmax) . Acceleration time “tacc” and deceleration time “tdec” of upper figure become longer than the linear acceleration time and deceleration time. When the set acceleration time(F07，E10，E12，E14) is assumed to be “Ta” and deceleration time(F08，E11，E13，E15) is assumed to be “Td”, “tacc” and “tdec” can be calculated by the following expressions.

XThe electrical discharge time which is measured in the factory shipment is set to function code U08 as a initial value. This value is different in each inverter. XThe electrical discharge time of the capacitor is measured automatically, when the power supply is turned off. And, the result is stored in function code U09. When the power supply is turned off under the conditions as follows, decrement rate (%) to the factory shipment can be measured. Conditions: which has been described to "*Estimation of life expectancy based on maintenance information" of the instruction manual "8-2 periodical inspection". The result of

U 09 × 100 is displayed in CAP=xxx.x% U 08

of maintenance information. 85% becomes a standard at the part replacement time.

5-43

◆When you make measurement of capacity and life expectancy judgment of capacitor with an actual operating condition, set the value “30” to the function code “E20 to E24”. And write the measurement result U09 with an actual operating condition to the function code U08 as an initial value as early as possible since inverter operation starts. However, life judgment by the measurement result cannot be performed in case of 1 and 2 as below. 1. During inverter operation, a power supply is turned off and it stops. 2. Cooling fan ON/OFF control is used. (function code : H 06= 1) Turn off the power supply of inverter, on the conditions at which the inverter has stopped, and a cooling fan is operated. It is not necessary to remove an option card and the connection with a control terminal. As for this "measurement with an actual operating condition", carry out this measurement about 10 times to minimize the error of a measurement result, and make the average value into an initial value. Moreover, when there is 10% or more of change from the last measured value, measurement is disregarded in order to prevent incorrect measurement. Renewal of a display is not carried out. ◆Set measured value U09 to the initial value U08 after exchanging capacitors. Related Functions E20 to E24 (Set value：30) U10

PC board capacitor powered on time

◆The accumulation time of the capacitor on PC board are displayed. The accumulation time of the control power supply multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient defined by the temperature inside the inverter are displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not agree with the actual operating hours. Since the accumulation time are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded. The accumulation time are displayed in TCAP=xxxxxh of maintenance information. The standard at the replacement time is 61,000h. Refer to the manual "8-2 regular check" for the maintenance.

U 1 0 U S E R

1 0

Setting range： 0 to 65535 hours ◆Clear the accumulation time to 0 hour, after replacing the PC board on which capacitors are equipped with. There is also PC Board without the capacitor (ex :Control circuit board) not to be cleared the accumulation time. For details, contact Fuji Electric. Related Functions E20 to E24 (Set value：30) U11

influenced significantly by the temperature. Refer to the manual "8-2 regular check" for the maintenance.

U 1 1 U S E R

1 1

Setting range : 0 to 65535 hours ◆ Clear integrated operating time to 0 hour after replacing the cooling fan. Related Functions E20 to E24 (Set value：30) U13

Magnetize current vibration damping gain

◆Adjust if Magnetize current vibration was occurred in the inverter output current .

U 1 3 U S E R

1 3

Setting range: 0 to 32767 ◆Adjust the value from 0 to 2048 as a standard value. Vibration damping gain becomes 100% in set value 4096. U15

Slip compensation filter time constant

◆The filter time constant of Slip compensation is set.

U 1 5 U S E R

1 5

Setting range : 0 to 32767 ◆Calculate the filter time constant using the following formula.

Filter time constant =

2 16 " U15" set value

[ms]

◆The response time of the control slows because the filter time constant is enlarged when a value is set to smaller. However, system becomes steady. ◆The response time of the control quickens because the filter time constant becomes smaller, when a set value is enlarged. Note ： Response time quickens when a set value is enlarged. Therefore, there is a possibility that the output frequency becomes unstable. Please adjust a set value to smaller than factory setting value. U23

Integral gain of continuous operation at power failure

U24

Proportional gain of continuous operation at power failure

◆This function becomes effective, when function code F14 (Restart mode after momentary power failure) set value is 2 or 3.

U 2 3 U S E R

2 3

U 2 4 U S E R

2 4

Setting range : 0～65535

Cooling fan operating time

◆The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded. The integrated hours are displayed in TFAN=xxxxxh of maintenance information. The standard at the replacement time is 40,000h in the inverter of 5HP or less. The standard at the replacement time is 25,000h in the inverter of 7.5HP or more. (Estimated life expectancy of a cooling-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40 degree.) The displayed value should be considered as a rough estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is

5-44

◆In case of F14 set value : 2. When the operation continuation level (H15) is reached, deceleration to a stop occurs. The DC voltage of the main circuit sharpens the deceleration slope, and the inverter collects the inertia energy of the load to maintain the DC bus voltage and controls the motor until it stops, so that the undervoltage protective function is not activated. The deceleration slope is adjusted with U23 and U24. However, the deceleration operation time never becomes longer than the set deceleration time.

◆In case of F14 set value : 3. The output frequency is lowered by the control by which the DC voltage of the main circuit is kept constant from the regeneration energy, so that the inverter may continue operation when momentary power failure occurs. The response is adjusted with U23 and U24 at this time. ◆Calculate the integral gain using the following formula.

Integral gain =

2 16 " U 23" set value

◆When function code F13 (electronic thermal)is set to 2, both the type of the braking resistor and connection circuit are set. Factory setting is set to nominal applied resistor and the number of resistor is one. When the power load capacities of resistor are increased, set the factory setting properly

U 5 9 U S E R

[ms]

Setting of ten’s digit ( type selection ) Set value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

|ｆ＊| PI calculator

H15 Set value

0 I gain：U23 P gain：U24

DC voltage of the main circuit

U48

Input phase loss protection

◆This function selects operation of input phase loss or power supply unbalance protection.

U 4 8 U S E R

4 8

Setting range : 0 to 2

！ CAUTION △ U49

Operation Active (without reactor (ACR/DCR)) Active (with reactor (ACR/DCR)) Inactive When "2" is set to U48, protection operation of the inverter to input phase loss or power supply voltage unbalance does not work. If you use it as it is, there is a possibility of damaging an inverter. Failure may result.

Setting of unit’s digit (connection circuit selection) *1) Power Braking-resistor Duty Synthetic consumption per cycle resistance resistance Use [Ω] Connection circuit [%ED] [comparatively] number 0 1 10% R 100% Ｐ

RS-485 protocol selection

◆The protocol of RS-485 communication is changed.

U 4 9 U S E R

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

Ｐ

ＤＢ

20%

50%

20%

(1/2)R

50%

40%

25%

30%

33%

50%

(3/2)R

17%

50%

11%

40%

25%

50%

12.5%

4 9

Set value : 0, 1 Set value 0 1

Duty Resistance Capacity cycle [Ω] [W] [%ED] Type braking resistor Standard applied resistor 10% DB0.75-2C 100 200 DB2.2-2C 40 400 DB3.7-2C 33 400 DB5.5-2C 20 800 DB7.5-2C 15 900 DB0.75-4C 200 200 DB2.2-4C 160 400 DB3.7-4C 130 400 DB5.5-4C 80 800 DB7.5-4C 60 900

Set value

Set value 0 1 2

5 9

Setting range : 0 to A8 (HEX) Output frequency command |ｆ＊＊|

Output frequency command |ｆ＊|

Braking - resistor function select [30HP or less is corresponded]

U59

Operation FGI-bus Modbus-RTU

Instruction manual and specifications are prepared about communicative details. Contact Fuji Electric.

U56

Speed agreement /PG error(Detection width)

U57

Speed agreement /PG error (Detection timer)

U58

PG error selection

◆ These functions are effective for the option card ( OPC-G11S-PG，-PG2，-PGA ). Refer to each manual.

U 5 6 U S E R

5 6

U 5 7 U S E R

5 7

U 5 8 U S E R

5 8

5-45

Ｐ

ＤＢ

1) It is limited by the %ED value of the braking transistor inside the inverter.

！ CAUTION △ ◆Set the function code both “ F13” and “U59 ” before operating the inverter, and don’t change the functions during operation. The integrated thermal data are cleared immediately, when function code “ F13” or “U59 ” are changed. The overheat protection of resistor becomes invalid. When the function code “ F13” or “U59 ” are changed in the state where temperature rose, the overheat protection of resistor becomes invalid, too. ◆As there is a possibility of damaging the inverter, the resistor value less than standard applied value should not be available. ◆Make into one kind the resistor used as combination conditions for a braking resistor, and connect it so that the electric power is consumed equally in each resistor. ◆When the resistor which is instead of DB***-2C/4C are used as External braking resistor, function code F13 should be set to “0”. ◆ When resistor values less than Standard applied resistor value is set to the function code, regeneration operation is invalid. OU alarm will be occurred. ◆If connection of resistor and setting value of resistor is not corresponded, there is a possibility of damaging the resistor and the inverter.

Failure may result. Function for manufacturer [40HP or more is corresponded] This function is available to release the overheating alarm (OH1) at the DC fan broken.

◆If function code U60 is set to “0”, braking torque is kept to about “0%” under acceleration, deceleration, constant speed state. Output frequency is controlled in correspond to the rapid change in motor load to prevent OU alarm. Deceleration time becomes longer than the set deceleration time (F08). ◆In case of setting value U60:1, Compared with setting value "0", it controls not to perform torque limit operation only at the deceleration time, but to prevent the rise of the DC voltage of the main circuit, and avoid OU alarm. At this time, although deceleration time becomes longer than a setting value of F08, it becomes shorter than setting value"0" of U60. It may occur OU alarm, if load changes rapidly during deceleration.

U61

Voltage detect offset and gain adjustment

◆40HP or more : It adjusts, only when a print board is replaced by maintenance, etc. If not necessary, do not use this function.

U 6 1 U S E R Inverter capacity 30HP or less

U59

U 5 9 U S E R

Operation OH1 alarm at DC fan broken No alarm at DC fan broken

！ CAUTION △ ◆It causes overheating trip (OH1,OH3) in the inverter, and the life time decrease such as electrolytic capacitors on the PCB in the unit by a partial rise temperature, and there is a possibility to the worst unit damage when left with the DC fan for an internal stir stops. Be sure that set it to the fan exchange and the factory setting value again promptly after the DC fan for an internal stir stops. (Contact the fan exchange procedure Fuji Electric.)

Failure may result. U60

Regeneration avoidance at deceleration

◆This function is available, when torque limit (brake) of F41( or E17) is set to “0%”.

U 6 0 U S E R

6 0

Set value : 0, 1 Set value 0 1

40HP or more

Operation 0：Inactive(fixed) 0：Inactive 1：Voltage detect offset adjustment 2：Voltage detect gain adjustment

◆Set the function code in the following procedure. If the inverter are operated without this adjustment after replacing the PC board, normal operation may not be able to be performed.

5 9

Set value : 00, 01 Set value 00 01

6 1

Set value : 0, 1, 2

Operation Torque limit operation （for high response use） OU alarm avoidance operation （for only deceleration or Large inertia use ）

5-46

(Offset adjustment) 1) Confirm that the main power supply is turned ON, the motor wiring are connected and the motor has stopped (inverter operation command is OFF). 2) When the data of U61 is changed to "1", and the FUNC/DATA key is ON, the offset self adjustment is started. The display of “storing" of the keypad panel disappears several seconds later. When the set value returns to "0", adjustment is completed. If the main power supply is turned OFF, while outputting alarm, motor is driving, coast-to-stop command(BX) is ON and this adjustment is started, the inverter becomes “Er7:TUNING ERROR". In this case, start the adjustment after removing the above-mentioned factor. (Gain adjustment) 1) Drive the motor in an arbitrary frequency of about 10 to 60Hz(However, constant speed) after executing the above-mentioned offset adjustment.(U61:1) At this time, gain adjustment is available unrelated to the load state. 2) When the data of U61 is changed to "2", and the FUNC/DATA key is ON, the gain self adjustment is started. The display of “storing" of the keypad panel disappears several seconds to 30 seconds later. When the set value returns to "0", adjustment is completed. If inverter is not operated, this adjustment is not available.

U89

Motor overload memory retention

â&#x2014;&#x2020;This is Motor overload memory (Electrical thermal O/L relay) retention selection at power up.

U 8 9 U S E R

8 9

Setting range : 0, 1 Set value 0

Operation Inactive When power up the drive, Motor overload data is reset. Active. When power is down, the drive stores Motor overload data and use this data at next power up.

5-47

6. Protective Operation 6-1 List of Protective Operations In the event of an abnormality in the inverter, the protective function will activate immediately to trip the inverter, display the alarm name on the LED monitor, and the motor coasts-to-a stop. For alarm contents, see Section 6.1.1. Table 6.6.1 List of alarm displays and protective functions Keypad panel display Alarm Name Contents of operation LED LCD OC1 OC DURING ACC During If the inverter output current momentarily exceeds the overcurrent acceleration detection level due to an overcurrent in the motor, or a short-circuit or a ground fault in the output circuit, the protective function is During activated. deceleration Running at constant speed If a ground fault in the inverter output circuit is detected, the protective function is activated (for 40HP or more only). If a ground fault occurs in an inverter rated at 30HP or less, the inverter is protected by the overcurrent protection. If protection against personal injury or property damage is required, install a ground-fault protective relay or earth-leakage circuit breaker separately. If the DC link circuit voltage of the main circuit exceeds the During overvoltage detection level (230V series: 400V DC,460V series: acceleration 800V DC) due to an increase in the regenerating current from the During motor, the output is shut down. deceleration However, protection against inadvertent overvoltage apply (e.g., Running at high-voltage line) may not be provided. constant speed If the DC link circuit voltage of the main circuit falls below the undervoltage detection level (230V series: 200V DC,460V series: 400V DC) due to a lowered power supply, the output is shut down. If function code F14 (Restart after momentary power failure) is selected, an alarm is not displayed. In addition, if the supply voltage falls to a level unable to maintain control power, an alarm may not be displayed. If the inverter is driven with any one of the three phases connected to L1/R, L2/S and L3/T of the main circuit power supply "open", the rectifying diodes or smoothing capacitors may be damaged, at such time an alarm is issued and the inverter is tripped. If the temperature of the heat sink rises due to a cooling fan failure, etc., the protective function is activated. If the external alarm contacts of the braking unit, braking resistor or external thermal O/L relay are connected to the control circuit terminals (THR), this alarm will be actuated according to contact off signal. When the PCT thermal protection is activated(H26:1), it operates when the detected temperature is increased. If the temperature inside the inverter rises due to poor ventilation, etc., the protective function is activated. Overcurrent of the terminal 13(20mA or more) due to the short circuit between the terminal 13 and 11, etc., the protective function is activated. If electronic thermal O/L relay (for braking resistor) function code F13 is selected, the protective function is activated to prevent the resistor from burning due to overheating following frequent use of the braking resistor. The protective function is activated if the motor current exceeds the preset level, provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 1 function code F10 has been selected. If the second motor current exceeds the preset level when the operation is switched to drive the second motor, the protective function is activated, provided that electronic thermal O/L relay 2 of function code A04 is selected.

OC2

OC DURING DEC

OC3

OC AT SET SPD

GROUND FAULT

OU1

OV DURING ACC

OU2

OV DURING DEC

OU3

OV AT SET SPD

UNDERVOLTAGE

Lin

PHASE LOSS

Overheating of heat sink External alarm

OH1

FIN OVERHEAT

OH2

EXT ALARM

Inverter internal overheating

OH3

HIGH AMB TEMP

Overheating of braking resistor

dbH

DBR OVERHEAT

Motor 1 overload

OL1

MOTOR1 OL

Motor 2 overload

OL2

MOTOR2 OL

Inverter overload

OLU

INVERTER OL

Blown fuse

FUS

DC FUSE OPEN

Memory error

Er1

MEMORY ERROR

Keypad panel communication error CPU error Option error

Er2

KEYPD COM ERR

Er3 Er4 Er5 Er6 Er7

CPU ERROR OPTN COM ERR OPTION ERROR OPR PROCD ERR TUNING ERROR

If an CPU error occurs due to noise, etc., the protective function is activated. Error when using an optional unit

Er8

RS-485 COM ERR

If an error occurs when using RS-485, the protective function is activated.

Over current

Ground fault

Overvoltage

Undervoltage

Input open-phase

Forced stop Output wiring error RS-485 communication error

If the output current exceeds the rated overload current, the protective function is activated to provide thermal protection against semiconductor element overheating in the inverter main circuit. If the fuse in the inverter is blown out following a short-circuit or damage to the internal circuit, the protective function is activated (for 40HP or more only). If a memory error occurs, such as missing or invalid data, the protective function is activated. If a communication error or interrupt between the keypad panel and control circuit is detected, the protective function is activated.

Error when using the forced stop command If there is an open circuit or a connection error in the inverter output wiring during performing auto-tuning, the protective function is activated.

6-1

6-2 Alarm Reset

10ms

To release the trip status, enter the reset command by pressing the RESET key on the keypad panel or inputting signal from the terminal (RST) of the control terminals after removing the cause of the trip. Since the reset command is an edge operation, input a command such as !!OFF-ON-OFF!! as shown in Fig.6-2-1. When releasing the trip status, set the operation command to OFF. If the operation command is set to ON, inverter will start operation after resetting.

ďź

WARNING

Reset command

OFF

Keypad panel display

OFF Trip

OFF Normal display

Alarm display Alarm output

(Operable)

OFF

Fig.6-2-1

If the alarm reset is activated with the operation signal ON, the inverter will restart suddenly, which may be dangerous. To ensure safety, disable the operating signal when releasing the trip status. as accident may result.

6-2

7.Trouble shooting 7.1

Protective function activation

(1) Overcurrent Overcurrent during acceleration OC1

YES

Remove the short-circuit and ground fault.

Overcurrent during deceleration OC2

Are the motor connecting terminals (U, V, W) short-circuited or grounded? NO

Reduce the load or increase the inverter capacity.

YES

Can the torque boost amount be reduced?

Is the load excessive? NO

NO NO

Overcurrent running at constant speed OC3

Is the torque boost correct?

YES

Reduce the torque boost. NO

Is the acceleration time setting too short compared with the load? YES

Faulty inverter or error due to noise. Consult with Fuji Electric.

Is the deceleration time setting too short compared with the load? YES NO

YES

Has the load changed suddenly? YES

Can the acceleration time setting be prolonged? NO YES

Prolong time settings.

Can the deceleration time setting be prolonged? NO The braking method requires inspection. Contact Fuji Electric.

Reduce the load or increase the inverter capacity.

(2) Ground fault Remove the grounded part. YES Ground fault EF

Is a part in the inverter output circuit (cable, motor) grounded?

Faulty inverter or error due to noise. Contact Fuji Electric.

Note:The ground fault protective function is provided only for inverter for nominal applied motors rated at 40HP or more.

(3) Fuse brown Fuse brown FUS

Possible short-circuit within the inverter. Contact Fuji Electric.

7-1

(4) Overvoltage Overvoltage during acceleration OU1 Reduce the supply voltage to less than the specified upper limit.

Overvoltage during deceleration OU2

Overvoltage running at constant speed OU3

Is the power supply voltage within the specified value? YES YES YES Is start mode(H09) activated and its start-mode? NO NO Is restart mode after momentary power failure or operation switching between line and inverter? NO NO

Check the motor and /or the terminal(U, V, W) is shorted or ground fault.

YES NO

Restart time(H13) is set longer.

YES NO

Does OU activated when the load is suddenly removed? YES NO NO NO NO Faulty inverter or error due to noise. Contact Fuji Electric.

YES

Does the main circuit DC link circuit voltage exceed the protection level? YES

Does OU alarm activate when acceleration is completed? YES

Can the acceleration time be prolonged? NO

YES

YES NO

YES

Can the deceleration time be prolonged? NO Reduce.

YES

Prolong.

Can the moment of load inertia be reduced? NO NO Is the braking device or DC brake function in use? YES YES

NO NO YES

Consider using a braking system or DC brake function.

Inspect the braking method. Contact Fuji Electric.

(5) Low voltage Low voltage LU

Has a (momentary) power failure occurred?

YES

Reset and restart operation.

Faulty of inverter control circuit or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

NO NO

Faulty parts or loose connection in the power circuit?

YES

Replace the faulty part and repair the connection. YES

Is the power supply voltage within the specified value? NO

YES

Is there a load requiring a large starting current within the same power distribution group?

YES

Does LU activate when the circuit breaker or magnetic contactor is switched on?

YES

Modify power distribution system to satisfy the specified value.

7-2

Is power transformer capacity adequate?

Is the main circuit DC voltage (between P-N) higher than the detection level specified in Section 6.1.1? NO

YES

The inverter may be faulty. Contact Fuji Electric.

(6)(6) Overtemperature at inside air air Overtemperature at inside andand overheating at heatsink. overheating at heatsink. Overtemperature at inside air OH3

Overtemperature at inside air OH3 Is between the control

(7) External thermal relay tripped External thermal relay tripped OH2

Overheating at heatsink OH1

Overheating at heatsink OH1 YES Is between the control

terminals 13-11 closed?

YES

terminals 13-11 closed? NO

Check the temperature of Remove the short circuit. the heatsink usingthe the alarm Check temperature of information thedisplayed heatsink using the alarm on the keypad panel. information displayed Is the cooling fan NO on the keypad panel. for mixing inside air rotating? Check the keypad panel display. (40HP or more) YES Display limit or not? 30HP or less: 20 degrees C. or less) Does the heatsink FaultyYES(30HP detection (40HP or more: 50 degrees C) YES Faulty detection temperature indicate circuit on PCB. NO circuit on PCB. Contact Fuji Electric. Contact Fuji Electric. Is the peripheralNO temperature of the inverter â&#x20AC;&#x201C;10 degrees C NOYESMake peripheral Isor the Reduce the less ?load excessive? temperature of the inverter to meet YES NO the specification. YES

Is the load excessive?

Is the cooling NO fan rotating?

Is the cooling fan rotating?

Replace the cooling fan.

YES NO

Remove Replace the obstacles. cooling fan for mixing inside air.

YES YES

Remove obstacles.

the specification? NO Is the ambient NO temperature within the specification ?

YES

Arrange peripheral conditions to meet Arrange peripheral the specification. conditions to meet

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contract Fuji Electric. no

YES

NO Is PTC level H27 set correctly?

Incorrect motor load or inadequate cooling. Check the motor side.

Set to correct value.

Change to regular external circuit.

YES Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Is data input to the control terminals THR-X1 to X9? Are alarm signals from external equipment input to the terminals and the CM?

Connect the alarm signal contact.

YES

the specification.

(8) Inverter unit overload and motor overload Inverter unit overload OLU

Is PTC operating?

Replace the cooling fan.

YES(30HP or less)

Is the ambient Is the cooling air passage blocked? within temperature

YES

Is the external circuit (including constants) regular?

YES Is the fan Iscooling the cooling air for mixing insideblocked? air passage rotating? (40HP or more) NO

Is PTC MODE H26 enabled?

YES load.

Reduce the load.

YES

Is the alarm function of the external equipment operating correctly?

Motor overload OL1, OL2

YES Do the characteristics of the electronic thermal O/L relay and motor overload match?

NO Connect a thermal O/L relay externally.

YES Is the electronic thermal O/L relay setting correct?

Set to the correct level

YES Is the load excessive? YES

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Reduce the load or increase inverter capacity

7-3

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Remove the cause of alarm function activation.

(9) Memory error Er1, (9) Memory errorpanel Er1, Keypad communication error Er2, Keypad panel communication error Er2, CPU error CPU error Er3 Er3

(10) Output wiring error (10) Output wiring error

Er1,2,3 indicated. Abnormal display or indication goes out.

Output wiring error Er7

Are the braking unit and braking resistor connected incorrectly?

Connect correctly the cable.

YES

NO Turn the power off then on again after the CHARGE lamp (CRG) goes off.

YES

Is the wiring of CNRXTX(RED) correct on the power PCB? (When DC power supply, connect it to the R0-T0 side and AC power input is connected to the auxilialy power input terminal.)

Did the error occur during tuning?

NO YES

Is Er1 displayed?

Is there noise source around?

YES

Is the auxiliary control power input terminal used?

Are the braking unit and braking resistor connected incorrectly?

YES

Connect correctly or replace the cable.

NO Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Did the power off when the function data was writing?

Is The the U,V,W U,V,Wterminal terminal Is wiring not connected wiring connected or is not there an open or circuit? is there an open circuit?

YES Is it possible to reset the alarm after the initialize by H03?

YES

Is the keypad panel connector loose?

Inverter is normal. Continue operation.

Connect YES correctly or replace the cable.

YES Inverter may be faulty. Contact Fuji Electric.

YES

Secure the connector.

NO theoperation operation signal Is Is the OFF during signal OFF during auto-tuing? auto-tuning?

(11) Input phase loss

YES

Do not operation signal OFF until finishing the auto tuning.

YES

Acceleration/Deceleration time is longer.

Input phase loss Lin

YES

NO The trouble part is improvement.

Is disappeared an error code on the LED monitor? YES

Is Er7 displayed?

overcurrent limiting IsIs itit overcurrent limiting because of of small because smallvalue valueofof acceleration/deceleration accelaration/deceleration timetime(F07/F08)? (F07/F08)?

Is the inverter ROM No. S09000 or more?

YES Is the setting value of input phase loss protection (U48) is correct?

Is the coast-to-stop signal(BX) ON? NO

Set it correct value.

YES

NO Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Are all main circuit power supply terminals L1/R, L2/S and L3/T connected to the power supply?

Connect all three phases.

YES Are there loose screws on the terminal block?

YES

Tightenen the screws on the terminal block.

NO Is there a significant imbalance voltage between phases?

YES

The power supply is incorrect. The inspection of the power supply is needed including the wiring.

NO Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

(12) Charging circuit error Charging circuit error Er7

circuit

power

supply

terminals

Is circuit power terminalstheL1/R, L1/R,L2/S andsupply L3/T supplied powerL2/S and L3/T supplied the power voltage? voltage?

Input the voltage.

YES Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

7-4

YES

It is OFF.

YES

Connect correctly the cable.

7-2

Abnormal motor rotation

(1) If motor does not rotate Charge lamp (CRG) lights and LCD monitor lights up?

Motor does not rotate.

Are the circuit breaker and magnetic contactor on the power supply side switched on?

YES Remove the cause of alarm function activation and reset the alarm, then run the motor.

YES

Are the voltages on the power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) normal?

YES

NO Is operation method the keypad panel or control terminal input? If no error is detected, continue operation.

Turn on.

YES

Is the LCD monitor displaying an alarm mode screen?

Keypad panel

Is a jumper or DC reactor connected between terminals P1 and P(+)?

Check for problems (low voltage, an open-phase, a loose connection, poor contact) and remedy accordingly.

Connect.

YES

Control terminals

Inverter may be faulty. Contact Fuji Electric.

YES Does the motor run if FWD or REV is pressed? NO

YES

∧ Press the !Up! key and set the frequency.

external wiring between AreAre external wiring between control circuit terminals NO control circuit terminals FWD, connected FWD, REVREV-CM -CM correctly?correctly? connected

Was the forward or reverse operation command given?

YES

Has the frequency been set? YES

YES Does the motor start ∧ key when the !Up! is pressed? NO

Is the external wiring between control terminals 13, 12, 11, C1and V2 or between X1-X9 and CM for the multistep frequency selection connected correctly?

YES

Are the frequency limiter (High) and the frequency setting lower than the starting frequency?

YES

Are the inverter output terminals (U,V,W) provided with the proper voltage?

Faulty motor

Correct the wiring error. NO

YES Replace Replacethe thefaulty faulty frequency POT (VR), frequencysetting setting POT (VR) signal switch, , signalconverter, converter, switch, or as as required. orrelay relaycontacts contacts required.

Set the frequency correctly.

YES Replace the faulty switch or relay.

Inverter may be faulty. Contact Fuji Electric.

YES

NO YES

Excessive load? YES Is the torque boost set correctly? NO

YES

Are the cables to the motor connected correctly?

Correct the wiring error.

The load is excessive, resulting in motor lock. Reduce the load and check that the brake is released (if a mechanical brake is used).

Note: Monitor the operation command or frequency setting values, etc., on the LED or LCD monitor after selecting the respective functions.

Raise the torque boost.

The motor does not rotate if the following commands are issued. An operation command is issued while the coast-to-stop or DC braking command is output A reverse operation command is issued with the “H08 Rev. phase sequence lock” value set to 1.

7-5

(2) If the motor rotates but the speed does not change Is the maximum frequency setting too low?

The motor rotates but the speed does not change.

YES

Increase the setting.

YES

Change the setting.

Is the higher or lower frequency limiter activating?

Set the frequency. YES Keypad panel operation

YES

Pattern operation

Is the timer timing too long? NO YES

Is the pattern operation complete?

Which frequency setting methodis used: keypad panel, analog signal, multistep frequency, or UP/DOWN control? Is the pattern operation activated?

Does the speed change when the ∧ or ∨ key is pressed?

Analog signal

Multistep frequency UP/DOWN

Can the frequency setting signal(0 to ±10V, 4 to 20 mA) be changed?

YES

Are the external connections between X1-X9 and CM correct?

Are all acceleration and deceleration times identical?

Correct the connection error.

YES

Are the frequencies for each multistep frequency different?

Change the frequency setting.

YES

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Are the external connections between control terminals 13, 11, terminals 13,12, 12,11 ,V2 and C1 correct? YES

Replace the faulty frequency setting POT (VR) or signal converter as required.

Is the acceleration or deceleration time set too long? YES

Change the time setting to conform to load values.

In the following cases, changing the motor speed is also restricted: Signals are input from control terminals both 12 and C1 when “F01 Frequency command 1”and “C30 Frequency command 2” are set to 3, and there is no significant change in the added value The load is excessive, and the torque limiting and current limiting functions are activated

7-6

(3) If the motor stalls during acceleration The motor stalls during acceleration.

Is the acceleration time too short?

YES

Prolong the time.

NO Is the inertia moment of the motor or the load excessive?

YES

Reduce the torque of the load or increase the inverter capacity.

YES

Has the motor terminal voltage dropped?

Contact Fuji Electric.

Reduce the inertia moment of the load or increase the inverter capacity.

YES

NO Use a thicker cable between the inverter and the motor or shorten the cable length.

Is a special motor used?

Is the torque of the load excessive? NO

Is the torque boost set correctly?

YES

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

Increase the torque boost.

(4) If the motor generates abnormal heat The motor generates abnormal heat.

Is the torque boost excessive?

YES

Reduce the torque boost.

Has the motor been operated continuously at a very low speed?

YES

Use a motor exclusive to the inverter.

Is the load excessive?

YES

Reduce the load or increase motor capacity.

Is the inverter output voltage (at terminals U, V, W) balanced?

YES

Faulty motor

Faulty inverter or error due to noise, etc. Contact Fuji Electric.

7-7

Note: Motor overheating following a higher frequency setting is likely the result of current waveform. Contact Fuji Electric.

8. Maintenance and Inspection Proceed with daily inspection and periodic inspection to prevent malfunction and ensure long-term reliability. Note the following: 8-1 Daily Inspection During operation, a visual inspection for abnormal operation is completed externally without removing the covers The inspections usually cover the following: (1) The performance (satisfying the standard specification) is as expected. (2) The environment satisfies standard specifications. (3) The keypad panel display is normal. (4) There are no abnormal sounds, vibrations, or odors. (5) There are no indications of overheating or no discoloration.

8-2 Periodical Inspection Periodic inspections must be completed after stopping operations, cutting off the power source, and removing the surface cover. Note that after turning off the power, the smoothing capacitors in the DC section in the main circuit take time to discharge. To prevent electric shock, confirm using a multimeter that the voltage has dropped below the safety value (25 V DC or below) after the charge lamp (CRG) goes off. • Start the inspection at least five minutes after turning off the power supply for inverter rated at 30HP or less, and ten minutes for inverter rated at 40HP or more. (Check that the charge lamp (CRG) goes off, and that the voltage is 25V DC or less between terminals P(+) and N(-). Electric shock may result. • Only authorized personnel should perform maintenance and component ！ WARNING replacement operations. (Remove metal jewelry such as watches and rings.) (Use insulated tools.)) • Never modify the inverter. Electric shock or injury may result.

Table 8-2-1 Periodical inspection list Check parts

Environment

Keypad panel

Structure such as a frame or cover

Main circuit

Common

Conductor and wire

Check items 1) Check the ambient temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist, water drops). 2) Is the area surrounding the equipment clear of foreign objects. 1) Is the display hard to read? 2) Are the characters complete?

How to inspect 1) Conduct visual inspection and use the meter. 2) Visual inspection

Evaluation Criteria 1) The specified standard value must be satisfied. 2) The area is clear.

1),2) Visual inspection

1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration? 2) Are nuts or bolts loose? 3) Is there deformation or damage? 4) Is there discoloration as a result of overheating? 5) Are there stains or dust? 1) Are there loose or missing nuts or bolts? 2) Are there deformation, cracks, damage, and discoloration due to overheating or deterioration in the equipment and insulation? 3) Are there stains and dust?

1) Visual and aural inspection 2) Tighten. 3),4),5) Visual inspection

1),2) The display can be read and is not abnormal. 1), 2), 3), 4), 5) Not abnormal

1) Is there discoloration or distortion of a conductor due to overheating? 2) Are there cracks, crazing or discoloration of the cable sheath?

8-1

1) Tighten. 2),3) Visual inspection

1),2) Visual inspection

1), 2), 3) Not abnormal Note: Discoloration of the bus bar does not indicate a problem. 1), 2) Not abnormal

Main circuit Main circuit Control circuit

Terminal block Smoothing capacitor

Is there damage? 1) Is there electrolyte leakage, discoloration, crazing, or swelling of the case? 2) Is the safety valve not protruding or are valves protruding too far? 3) Measure the capacitance if necessary.

Resistor

1) Is there unusual odor or damage to the insulation by overheating? 2) Is there an open circuit?

Transformer and reactor Magnetic conductor and relay Control PC board and connector

Is there abnormal buzzing or an unpleasant smell? 1) Is there rattling during operation? 2) Are the contacts rough?

Cooling system

Cooling fan

1) Are there any loose screws or connectors? 2) Is there an unusual odor or discoloration? 3) Are there cracks, damage, deformation, or excessive rust? 4) Is there electrolyte leakage or damage to the capacitor?

1) Is there abnormal sound or vibration? 2) Are nuts or bolts loose? 3) Is there discoloration due to overheating?

Ventilation

Is there foreign matter on the heat sink or intake and exhaust ports? Note: If equipment is stained, wipe with a clean cloth. Vacuum the dust.

Visual inspection 1), 2) Visual inspection 3) * Estimate life expectancy from maintenance information and from measurements using capacitance measuring equipment. 1) Visual and olfactory inspection 2) Conduct a visual Inspection or use a multimeter by removing the connection on one side. Aural, olfactory, and visual inspection 1) Aural inspection 2) Visual inspection 1) Tighten. 2) Visual and olfactory inspection 3) Visual inspection 4) * Estimate life expectancy by visual inspection and maintenance information 1) Aural and visual inspection. Turn manually (confirm the power is off). 2) Tighten. 3) Visual inspection 4) * Estimate life expectancy by maintenance information Visual inspection

Not abnormal 1), 2) Not abnormal 3) Capacitance ≧ initial value x 0.85

1) Not abnormal 2) Less than about ±10% of the indicated resistance value

Not abnormal 1),2)Not abnormal

1),2),3),4)Not abnormal

1) The fan must rotate smoothly. 2), 3) Not abnormal

Not abnormal

∗Estimation of life expectancy based on maintenance information The maintenance information is stored in the inverter keypad panel and indicates the electrostatic capacitance of the main circuit capacitors and the life expectancy of the electrolytic capacitors on the control PC board and of the cooling fans. Use this data as the basis to estimate the life expectancy of parts. 1) Determination of the capacitance of the main circuit capacitors This inverter is equipped with a function to automatically indicate the capacitance of the capacitors installed in the main circuit when powering up the inverter again after disconnecting the power according to the prescribed conditions. The initial capacitance values are set in the inverter when shipped from the factory, and the decrease ratio (%) to those values can be displayed. Use this function as follows:

8-2

(1) Remove any optional cards from the inverter. Also disconnect the DC bus connections to the main circuit P(+) and N(-) terminals from the braking unit or other inverters if connected. The existing power-factor correcting reactor (DC reactor) need not be disconnected. A power supply introduced to the auxiliary input terminals (R0, T0) that provides control power should be isolated. (2) Disable all the digital inputs (FWD, REV, X1-X9) on the control terminals. Also disconnect RS-485 communication if used. Turn on the main power supply. Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and that the inverter is not operating. (There is no problem if the "OH2 External thermal relay tripped" trip function is activated due to the digital input terminal setting off.) (3) Turn the main power off. (4) Turn on the main power again after verifying that the charge lamp is completely off. (5) Open the maintenance information on the keypad panel and confirm the capacitance values of the built-in capacitors. 2) Life expectancy of the control PC board The actual capacitance of a capacitor is not measured in this case. However, the integrated operating hours of the control power supply multiplied by the life expectancy coefficient defined by the temperature inside the inverter will be displayed. Hence, the hours displayed may not agree with the actual operating hours depending on the operational environment. Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded. 3) Life expectancy of cooling fan The integrated operating hours of the cooling fan are displayed. Since the integrated hours are counted by unit hours, power input for less than one hour will be disregarded. The displayed value should be considered as a rough estimate because the actual life of a cooling fan is influenced significantly by the temperature. Table 8-2-2 Rough estimate of life expectancy using maintenance information

Parts

Level of judgment

Capacitor in main circuit

85% or less of the initial value

Electrolytic capacitor on control PC board

61,000 hours

Cooling fan

40,000 hours (5HP or less), 25,000 hours (Over 7.5HP) (*1)

*1 Estimated life expectancy of a ventilation-fan at inverter ambient temperature of 40Â°C (104Â°F)

8-3

8-3 Measurement of Main Circuit Electrical Quantity The indicated values depend on the type of meter because the harmonic component is included in the voltage and current of the main circuit power (input) and the output (motor) side of the inverter. When measuring with a meter for commercial power frequency use, use the meters shown in Table 8.3.1. The power-factor cannot be measured using power-factor meters currently available on the market, which measure the phase difference between voltage and current. When power-factors must be measured, measure the power, voltage, and current on the input side and output side, then calculate the power-factor using the following formula: Power[ W] Power − factor = × 100[%] 3 × Voltage[V ] × Current[A ] Table 8-3-1

Meters for measuring main circuit Input (power supply) side

Item

Voltage

Meter name

Ammeter

Meter type

Moving-iron type

AR,S,T

Current*

Voltmeter VR,S,T Rectifier or moving-iron type

Output (motor) side

Voltage

Powermeter WR,S,T

Ammeter AU,V,W

Digital power meter

Moving-iron type

DC link circuit voltage (P(+) - N(-))

Current

Voltmeter

VU,V,W Rectifier type

Powermeter WU,V,W

DC voltmeter V

Digital power meter

Moving-coil type

Symbol

Note: When measuring the output voltage using a rectifier type meter, an error may occur. Use a digital AC power meter to ensure accuracy.

Fig 8-3-1 Connection of the meters

8-4

8-4 Insulation Test Avoid testing an inverter with a megger because an insulation test is completed at the factory. If a megger test must be completed, proceed as described below. Use of an incorrect testing method may result in product damage. If the specifications for the dielectric strength test are not followed, the inverter may be damaged. If a dielectric strength test must be completed, contact your local distributor or nearest Fuji Electric sales office. (1) Megger test for the main circuit ① Use a 500V DC type megger and isolate the main power before commencing measurement. ② If the test voltage is connected to the control circuit, remove all connection cables to the control circuit. ③ Connect the main circuit terminals using common cables as shown in Fig. 8-4-1. ④ Execute the megger test only between the common cables connected to the main circuit and the ground (terminal G). ⑤ A megger indicating 5MΩ or more is normal. (This is the value measured with an inverter only.)

Fig. 8-4-1 Megger test

(2) Insulation test in the control circuit A megger test and a dielectric strength test must not be performed in the control circuit. resistance range multimeter for the control circuit.

Prepare a high

① Remove all external cables from the control circuit terminals. ② Conduct a continuity test between grounds. A result of 1MΩ or more is normal. (3) Exterior main circuit and sequence control circuit Remove all cables from inverter terminals to ensure the test voltage is not applied to the inverter.

8-5 Parts Replacement The life expectancy of a part depends on the type of part, the environment, and usage conditions. Parts should be replaced as shown in Table 8-5-1.

Table 8-5-1 Part replacement Part name Standard period for replacement Cooling fan 3 years Smoothing capacitor Electrolytic capacitor on the PC board Fuse Other parts

5 years 7 years

10 years －

Comments

Exchange for a new part. Exchange for a new part (determine after checking). Exchange for a new PC board (determine after checking). Exchange for a new part. Determine after checking.

8-6 Inquiries about Products and Product Guarantee (1) Inquiries If there is damage, a fault in the product, or questions concerning the product, contact your local distributor or nearest Fuji Electric sales office:

a) Inverter type b) Serial No. (equipment serial number) c) Purchase date d) Inquiry details (e.g., damaged part, extent of damage, questions, status of fault)

8-5

(2) Product guarantee --- Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order. When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials, please be aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract, catalog, specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below. In addition, the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used, etc., and may require periodic inspection. Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company. Furthermore, regarding purchased products and delivered products, we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products.

1. Free of Charge Warranty Period and Warranty Range 1-1 Free of charge warranty period (1) The product warranty period is "1 year from the date of purchase" or 24 month from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name place, whichever date is earlier. (2) However in cases where the use environment, conditions of use, use frequency and times, etc., have an effect on product life, this warranty period may not apply. (3) Furthermore, the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric's Service Department is "6 month from the date that repairs are completed."

1-2 Warranty range (1) In the event that breakdown occurs during the product's warranty period which is the responsibility of Fuji Electric, Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered. However, if the following cases are applicable, the terms of this warranty may not apply. 1) The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions, environment, handling or use methods, etc. which are not specified in the catalog, operation manual, specifications or other relevant documents. 2) The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji's product. 3) The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji's product, such as the customer's equipment or software design etc. 4) Concerning the Fuji's programmable products, the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company, or the results from using such a program. 5) The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric. 6) The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables, etc. specified in the operation manual or catalog, etc. 7) The breakdown was caused by a chemical or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered. 8) The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used. 9) The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company's responsibility, such as lightning or other disaster.

(2) Furthermore, the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone. (3) The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item (1) above and any damages (damage to or loss of machinery or equipment, or lost profits from the same, etc.) consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty.

1-3. Trouble diagnosis As a rule, the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis. However, at the customer's request, this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis. In this case, the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company's fee schedule.

2. Exclusion of Liability for Loss of Opportunity, etc. Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period, this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity, loss of profits, or damages arising from special circumstances, secondary damages, accident compensation to another company, or damages to products other than this company's products, whether foreseen or not by this company, which this company is not be responsible for causing.

3. Repair Period after Production Stop, Spare Parts Supply Period (Holding Period) Concerning models (products) which have gone out of production, this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. In addition, we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years, counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs. However, if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to produce or produce those parts, there may be causes where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7-year period. For details, please confirm at our company's business office or our service office.

4. Transfer Rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program, the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation.

5. Service Contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs. Depending on the request, these can be discussed separately.

6. Applicable Scope of Service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products. Consult the local supplier or Fuji for detail separately.

8-6

9. Specifications 9-1 Standard Specifications (1) Three-phase 230V series Nominal [HP]

G11

Input ratings

Output ratings

P11

applied

motor

Type FRN[][][]G11S-2UX Rated output capacity (*1) [kVA] Rated output current (*2) [A] Overload capability Starting torque Braking torque (*3) [%] Braking time [s] Braking duty cycle [%ED] Mass [lbs (kg)] Type FRN[][][]P11S-2UX Rated capacity (*1) [kVA] Rated output current (*2) [A] Overload capability Starting torque Braking torque (*3) [%] Braking time [s] Braking duty cycle [%ED] Mass [lbs (kg)] Rated output voltage (*4) [V] Rated output frequency [Hz] Phases, voltage, frequency Voltage/frequency variations Momentary voltage dip capability (*7) Required power supply capacity (*8)[kVA]

0.25

0.5

7.5

100

125

150

F25

F50

001

002

003

005

007

010

015

020

025

030

040

050

060

075

100

125

0.6

1.2

2.0

3.2

4.4

6.8

113

138

1.5

3.0

5.0

8.0

115

145

180

215

283

346

150% of rated output current for 1 min. 200% of rated output current for 0.5 s 200% or more (under torque vector control) 150% or more 100% or more 10 10 4.9 (2.2)

5 5

150% of rated output current for 1 min. 180% of rated output current for 0.5 s 180% or more (under torque vector control) Approx. 10 to 15%

Approx. 20%

5 3

4.9 5.5 (2.2) (2.5)

No limit No limit

8.4 (3.8)

13 (6.1)

22 (10)

22 23 23 64 (10) (10.5) (10.5) (29)

79 (36)

97 (44)

101 (46)

154 (70)

254 (115)

007

010

015

020

025

030

040

050

060

075

100

125

150

8.8

113

138

165

115

145

180

215

283

346

415

154 (70)

254 (115)

110% of rated output current for 1 min. 50% or more Approx. 20%

Approx. 10 to 15% No limit No limit

3-phase, 200V/50Hz,

13 13 (5.7) (5.7) 200V,220V,230V/60Hz -

13 (5.7)

22 (10)

22 23 64 (10) (10.5) (29)

64 (29)

79 (36)

97 (44)

101 (46)

50,60Hz 3-phase, 200 to 220V, 220 to 230V/50Hz 3-phase, 200 to 230V/60Hz

3-phase, 200 to 230V, 50/60Hz Voltage:

+10% to -15% (Imbalance rate between phases:

2% or less (*6) , Frequency:

+5% to -5%

Operation will continue with 165V or more. If voltage drops below 165V, operation will continue for up to 15 ms. If "Continuous operation" is selected, the output frequency will be lowered to withstand the load until normal voltage is resumed. 0.4

0.7

1.3

2.2

3.1

5.0

7.2

9.7

9-1

111

134

(2) Three-phase 460V series Nominal applied motor [HP] Type FRN[][][]G11S-4UX Rated output capacity (*1) [kVA] Rated output current (*2) [A] Overload capability G11 Starting torque Braking torque (*3) [%] Braking time [s] Braking duty cycle [%ED] Mass [lbs (kg)]

Input ratings

Output ratings

Type FRN[][][]P11S-4UX Rated capacity (*1) [kVA] Rated output current (*2) [A] Overload capability P11 Starting torque Braking torque (*3) [%] Braking time [s] Braking duty cycle [%ED] Mass [lbs (kg)] Rated output voltage(*4) [V] Rated output frequency [Hz] Phases, voltage, frequency Voltage/frequency variations Momentary voltage dip capability (*7) Required power supply capacity (*8)[kVA]

0.5

7.5 10

75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800

F50 001 002 003 005 007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600

1.2 2.0 2.9 4.4 7.2 10

89 120 140 167 202 242 300 331 414 466 518 590

1.5 2.5 3.7 5.5

91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740

150% of rated output current for 1 min. 200% of rated output current for 0.5 s 200% or more (under torque vector control) 50% or more 100% or more 20% or more 5 5

5 2

150% of rated output current for 1 min. 180% of rated output current for 0.5 s 180% or more (under torque vector control) 10 to 15% No limit No limit

4.9 5.5 8.4 8.4 8.4 14 14 22 22 23 23 64 75 86 88 106 154 154 220 220 309 309 705 705 904 904 (2.2) (2.5) (3.8) (3.8) (3.8) (6.5) (6.5) (10) (10) (10.5) (10.5) (29) (34) (39) (40) (48) (70) (70) (100) (100) (140) (140) (320) (320) (410) (410) -

007 010 015 020 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800

89 120 140 167 202 242 300 331 414 466 518 590 669 765

12.5 16.5 23

91 112 150 176 210 253 304 377 415 520 585 650 740 840 960

110% of rated output current for 1 min. 50% or more Approx. 20%

Approx. 10 to 15% No limit No limit

13 13 13 22 22 23 64 64 75 86 88 106 154 154 220 220 309 309 309 705 705 904 904 (6.1) (6.1) (6.1) (10) (10) (10.5) (29) (29) (34) (39) (40) (48) (70) (70) (100) (100) (140) (140) (140) (320) (320) (410) (410) 3-phase, 380V, 400V, 415V(440V)/50Hz, 380V, 400V, 440V, 460V/60Hz -

50,60Hz 3-phase,380 to 480V,50/60Hz Voltage:

3-phase, 380 to 440V/50Hz 3-phase, 380 to 480V/60Hz

+10% to -15% (Imbalance rate between phases:

*5)

2% or less (*6) , Frequency:

+5% to -5%

Operation will continue with 310V or more. If voltage drops below 310V, operation will continue for up to 15 ms. If "Continuous operation" is selected, the output frequency will be lowered to withstand the load until normal voltage is resumed. 0.7 1.2 2.2 3.1 5.0 7.2 9.7 15

111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 549 610

(*1) Indicated capacities are at the rated output voltage 230V for the 230V series and 460V for the 460V series. The rated capacity will be lowered if the supply voltage is lowered. (*2) In the case of a low impedance load, such as a high-frequency motor, the current may drop below the rated current. (*3) Indicates when a nominal applied motor is used (the average torque when decelerated to stoppage from 60 Hz, which varies depending on motor loss). (*4) An output voltage exceeding the supply voltage cannot be generated. (*5) The taps within the inverter must be changed for a power supply rated at 380 to 398V/50 Hz or 380 to 430V/60 Hz. (*6) If the imbalance between phases exceeds 2%, use a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR). Imbalance rate between phases [%] =

( Max. Voltage [V] - Min. Voltage [V] )

x 67[%]

3-phase average voltage [V] (*7) Test was conducted under the standard load conditions stipulated by the JEMA committee (at the load equivalent to 85% of the nominal applied motor). (*8) Indicates the values required when using a power-factor correcting DC reactor (DCR) (optional for inverters of 75HP or less) with a loaded nominal applied motor.

9-2

Output frequency

9-2 Common Specifications Item Control method Maximum frequency Base frequency Starting frequency Carrier frequency Accuracy (stability)

Control

Setting resolution Voltage/frequency characteristics

Torque boost Accelerating/decelerating time

DC injection braking Function equipped

Operation method

25 to 400Hz variable setting

0.1 to 60Hz variable setting

P11S: 25-120Hz variable setting

Holding time:

0.0 to 10.0 s

G11: 0.75 to 15kHz (75HP or less) 0.75 to 10kHz (100HP or more) P11: 0.75 to 15kHz (30HP or less) 0.75 to 10kHz (40 to 100HP) 0.75 to 6kHz (125HP or more) Analog setting: +/- 0.2% or less of the max. Frequency (at 25℃ (77°F) +/- 10℃ (50°F)) Digital setting: +/- 0.01% or less of the max. Frequency (-10℃ (14°F) to +5℃ (122°F)) Analog setting: 1/1000 of max. frequency (30HP or less) 1/3000 of max. frequency (40HP or more) Digital setting: 0.01Hz (99.99Hz or less), 0.1Hz (100.0Hz or more) Output voltage at base frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (230V series) or 320 to 480V (460V series). Output voltage at max. frequency can be adjusted separately, such as 80 to 240V (230V series) or 320 to 480V (460V series). Auto: Optimum control corresponding to the load torque. Manual: 0.1 to 20.0 code setting (energy saving reduced torque, constant torque (strong), etc.) 0.01 to 3600s Four accelerating and decelerating time settings are possible independent of each other by selecting digital input signals. In addition to linear acceleration and deceleration, either S-shaped acceleration/deceleration (weak/strong) or curvilinear acceleration/deceleration can be selected. Starting frequency: 0.0 to 60.0Hz, braking time: 0.0 to 30.0s, Braking level: 0 to 100% (G11S), 0-80% (P11S) Frequency upper and lower limiter, bias frequency, frequency gain, jump frequency, pick-up operation, restart after momentary power failure, switching operation from line to inverter, slip compensation control, automatic energy saving operation, regeneration avoiding control, droop control, torque limiting (2-step), torque control, PID control, second motor switching, cooling fan ON/OFF control. Keypad panel: Run by FWD , REV keys, stop by STOP key Terminal input: Forward/stop command, reverse/stop command, coast-to-stop command, alarm reset, acceleration/deceleration selection, multistep frequency selection, etc. Keypad panel: Setting by ∧ , ∨ keys External potentiometer: External freq.setting POT (VR) (1 to 5kΩ) Analog input: 0 to +10V (0 to +5V), 4 to 20mA, 0 to +/- 10V (FWD/REV operation) +10 V to 0 (reverse operation), 20 to 4mA (reverse operation) UP/DOWN control: Frequency increases or decreases as long as the digital input signal is turned on. Multistep frequency selection: Up to 15 steps are selectable by a combination of digital input signals (four kinds). Link operation: Operation by RS-485 (standard). Program operation: Pattern operation by program Jogging operation: Jogging operation by FWD , REV key or digital input signals

Operation status signal

Transistor output (4 signals): Running, frequency arrival, frequency detection, overload early warning, etc. Relay output (2 signals): Alarm output (for any fault), multi-purpose relay output signals Analog output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output voltage, output torque, power consumption, etc. Pulse output (1 signal): Output frequency, output current, output power, output torque, power consumption, etc. Output frequency, setting frequency, output current, output voltage, motor synchronous speed, line speed, load rotation speed, calculated torque value, power consumption, calculated PID value, PID command value, PID feedback value, alarm code Operation information, operational guide, functional code/name/setting data, alarm information, tester function, motor load rate measuring function (Maximum/average current (rms) during measuring period, maintenance information (Integrated operation hours, capacitance measurement for main circuit capacitors, heat sink temperature, etc.)) Six languages (Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian) Charging (voltage residual), operation indication Overcurrent, short-circuit, ground fault, overvoltage, undervoltage, overload, overheating, blown fuse, motor overload, external alarm, input open-phase, output open-phase (when tuning), braking resistor protection, CPU and memory error, keypad panel communication error, PTC thermistor protection, surge protection, stall prevention, etc. Indoor, altitude less than 3300ft (1000m), free from corrosive gas, dust, and direct sunlight (Pollution degree 2) -10℃ (14°F) to +50℃ (122°F) (ventilating cover must be removed under conditions exceeding +40℃ (104°F) for models rated at 30HP or less) 5 to 95%RH (no condensation) Operation/storage :86 to 106 kPa Transport :70 to 106 kPa 0.12inch(3mm) at from 2 to less than 9Hz, 9.8m/s2 at from 9 to less than 20Hz, 2m/s2 at from 20 to less than 55Hz, 1m/s2 at from 55 to less than 200Hz, -25℃ (-13°F) to +65℃ (149°F)

Operation Indication

G11S:

Frequency setting

Digital display (LED)

Liquid crystal display (LCD)

Language Lamp display Protective functions Installation location Ambient temperature Environment

Explanation Sinusoidal wave PWM control (with V/F control, torque vector control, PG feedback vector control (option)) G11S: 50 to 400Hz variable setting P11S: 50-120Hz variable setting

Ambient humidity Air pressure Vibration Storage

Ambient temperature Ambient humidity

5 to 95%RH (no condensation)

9-3

9-3 Outline Dimensions â&#x2013; Outline Dimensions (30HP or less)

inch (mm)

4.33(110) 3.78(96)

0.28(7) 0.28(7)

0.28(7)

0.24(6)

5.70(145)

5.90(150) 5.35(136)

0.28(7)

2.42(61.5) 0.24(6)

9.69(246)

0.61(15.5)

0.28(7)

0.31(8) 0.61(15.5)

1.56(39.5)

10.2(260)

9.69(246) 0.28(7)

0.24(6)

10.2(260)

0.28(7)

0.24(6)

3.43(87) 3.74(95) 0.31(8)

4.29(109)

3.92(99.5)

1.06 (27)

1.73 1.22 1.22 (44) (31) (31)

FRNF25G11S-2UX to FRNF50G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-4UX

5.12 (130)

1.44 (36.5)

3.15 (80)

3.70 (94)

2.82 (71.5)

FRN001G11S-2UX FRN001G11S-4UX

5.71 (145)

2.03 (51.5)

3.74 (95)

4.29 (109)

3.41 (86.5) FRN002G11S-2UX to FRN005G11S-2UX FRN002G11S-4UX to FRN005G11S-4UX

FRNF25G11S-2UX to FRN001G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-4UX to FRN001G11S-4UX

9.84(250)

7.68(195) 0.47(12)

5.49(139.5) 5.67(144) 0.31(8)

6.26(159)

0.39 (10) 2.17 2.42 (55) (61.5)

5.75(146)

5.51(140)

2.54 (64.5)

FRN007G11S-2UX to FRN010G11S-2UX FRN007G11S-4UX to FRN010G11S-4UX FRN007P11S-2UX to FRN015P11S-2UX FRN007P11S-4UX to FRN015P11S-4UX

FRN015G11S-2UX to FRN030G11S-2UX FRN015G11S-4UX to FRN030G11S-4UX FRN020P11S-2UX to FRN030P11S-2UX FRN020P11S-4UX to FRN030P11S-4UX

9-4

5.06(128.5)

0.43 (11)

1.81 2.07 (46) (52.5)

15.7(400)

14.88(378)

10.2(260)

9.37(238) 2.28 (58)

0.39(10)

0.43(11)

0.39(10)

4.17 (106)

4.09(104)

0.43(11)

7.72(196)

0.47(12) 0.43 (11)

8.66(220) 0.47(12)

7.68(195)

8.90(226)

0.47(12)

5.12(130) 0.31(8)

6.26(159)

■ Outline Dimensions (G11S :40HP to 350HP, P11S :40HP to 450HP) IInstallation 盤内設置型inside panel type

External cooling type 外部冷却型

H5 H4

2or3-φC

W W1 W3

D2 4-φ18 吊り穴

4or6取付寸法 mounting 4or6hole 取付ボルト W1 W3

4or6パネルカット寸法 mounting 4or6W2 hole 取付ボルト W1 W3

H3 H1

H2 H1 H

4-φ18 吊り穴

2or3-φC

H5 H4

D D1

H2 H1 H

W W1 W3

230V Series Nominal Inverter type applied FRN-G11S series FRN-P11S series motor[HP] 40 FRN040G11S-2UX FRN040P11S-2UX FRN050P11S-2UX － 50 FRN050G11S-2UX － FRN060P11S-2UX － 60 FRN060G11S-2UX － FRN075P11S-2UX － 75 FRN075G11S-2UX － FRN100P11S-2UX － 100 FRN100G11S-2UX － FRN125P11S-2UX － 125 FRN125G11S-2UX － 150 FRN150P11S-2UX －

Dimension W

13.4 9.45 12.8 (340) (240) (326)

14.8 10.8 14.2 (375) (275) (361)

Unit inch (mm) H1

21.7 20.9 19.7 20.2 (550) (530) (500) (512)

－

Mounting bolt

10.0 (255)

24.2 23.4 22.2 22.7 (615) (595) (565) (577) 0.47 0.98 0.35 5.71 0.39 (12) (25) (9) 10.6 (145) (10) (270) 0.16 29.1 28.3 27.2 27.6 (4) (740) (720) (690) (702)

29.5 28.3 27.0 27.4 (750) (720) (685) (695) 0.61 1.28 0.49 26.8 22.8 26.0 11.4 34.6 33.5 32.1 32.5 (15.5) (32.5) (12.5) (680) (580) (660) (290) (880) (850) (815) (825)

20.9 16.9 20.1 (530) (430) (510)

11.2 5.71 (285) (145)

0.59 (15)

14.2 8.66 (360) (220)

M12

460V Series Nominal Inverter type applied FRN-G11S series FRN-P11S series motor[HP] 40 FRN040G11S-4UX FRN040P11S-4UX － FRN050P11S-4UX 50 FRN050G11S-4UX －－ FRN060P11S-4UX 60 FRN060G11S-4UX －－ FRN075P11S-4UX 75 FRN075G11S-4UX －－ FRN100P11S-4UX 100 FRN100G11S-4UX －－ FRN125P11S-4UX 125 FRN125G11S-4UX －－ FRN150P11S-4UX 150 FRN150G11S-4UX －－ FRN200P11S-4UX 200 FRN200G11S-4UX －－ FRN250P11S-4UX 250 FRN250G11S-4UX －－ FRN300P11S-4UX 300 FRN300G11S-4UX －－ FRN350P11S-4UX 350 FRN350G11S-4UX －

Dimension W

13.4 9.45 12.8 (340) (240) (326)

Unit inch (mm) H1

0.47 0.98 0.35 5.71 26.6 25.8 24.6 25.1 (12) (25) (9) 10.6 (145) (270) (675) (655) (625) (637) －

Mounting bolt

10.0 (255)

21.7 20.9 19.7 20.2 (550) (530) (500) (512)

14.8 10.8 14.2 (375) (275) (361)

0.39 (10)

0.59 (15)

M12

29.1 28.3 27.2 27.6 (740) (720) (690) (702) 29.1 28.0 26.6 27.0 (740) (710) (675) (685)

12.4 6.89 0.16 (315) (175) (4)

20.9 16.9 20.1 (530) (430) (510) 0.61 1.28 0.49 (15.5) (32.5) (12.5) 39.4 38.2 36.8 37.2 (1000) (970) (935) (945)

400

26.8 22.8 26.0 11.4 FRN400P11S-4UX (680) (580) (660) (290)

450

FRN450P11S-4UX

9-5

14.2 8.66 (360) (220)

■Outline Dimensions (G11S :400HP or more ,P11S :500HP or more)

W W1

W2 W1

W3 W4

H5 H

Lifting bolts

Mounting dimensions of internal mounting type

Holes for fixing bolts

W5 D5

D1 D2

W3 W4

Mounting dimensions of external cooling type

460V Series Nominal Inverter type applied FRN-G11S series FRN-P11S series W W1 W2 motor[HP] 400 FRN400G11S-4UX －－ 450 26.8 22.8 26.0 FRN450G11S-4UX － (680) (580) (660) 500 FRN500P11S-4UX － 600 FRN600P11S-4UX － 500 FRN500G11S-4UX － 600 FRN600G11S-4UX － 34.6 30.7 33.9 700 FRN700P11S-4UX (880) (780) (860) － 800 FRN800P11S-4UX － Nominal Inverter type applied FRN-G11S series FRN-P11S series motor[HP] 400 FRN400G11S-4UX FRN450P11S-4UX － 450 FRN450G11S-4UX － 500 FRN500P11S-4UX － 600 FRN600P11S-4UX － 500 FRN500G11S-4UX － 600 FRN600G11S-4UX － 700 FRN700P11S-4UX － 800 FRN800P11S-4UX －

Dimension D2

Dimension W3

11.4 (290)

－

24.0 (610)

Unit inch (mm) H

55.1 53.9 52.4 52.8 52. 6 0.61 1.38 0.57 17.7 11.2 (1400) (1370) (1330) (1340) (1335) (15.5) (35) (14.5) (450) (285) 10.2 10.2 31.9 (260) (260) (810)

Unit inch (mm) D5

0.25 1.97 3.94 1.38 4.53 0.59 (6.4) (50) (100) (35) (115) (15)

9-6

Mounting bolt

M12

■ Outline Dimensions (Reactor; Accessories for 100HP or more) terminal 端子穴 hole

Fig. B

Fig. A

端子部詳細 terminal details MA X. E

F± 5

MA X. E

F± 5

B± 1 A± 3

4-ø G 取付穴 hole terminal

C±2

B± 1

D±3

A± 3

MA X. I

MA X. H

MA X. I

MA X. H

terminal 端子穴 hole

C±2

4-ø G

D±3

取付穴 hole terminal

terminal 端子穴 hole J

Fig. C 図B

terminal details 端子部詳細

L±3

MAX.F

K±3

MA X. H

E ±5

20 B± 1

4-ø G×20 長穴取付穴 hole terminal

C±2 D±3

A± 3

230V Series Dimension Inverter type

DC Reactor type

FRN100G11S/P11S-2UX

DCR2-75B

FRN125G11S/P11S-2UX

DCR2-90B

FRN150P11S-2UX

DCR2-110B

Fig. Fig. A Fig. B

Unit inch (mm)

Terminal hole size

7.87 (200) 7.09 (180) 7.48 (190)

6.69 (170) 5.91 (150) 6.30 (160)

3.94 (100) 4.33 (110) 4.72 (120)

5.55 (141) 5.94 (151) 6.34 (161)

4.33 (110) 5.51 (140) 5.91 (150)

2.76 (70) 2.95 (75) 3.15 (80)

8.27 (210) 9.45 (240) 10.6 (270)

10.6 (270) 11.0 (280) 13.0 (330)

—

M12

0.39 (10)

0.98 (25)

—

φ15

Terminal hole size

5.94 (151)

3.94 (100)

2.95 (75)

9.45 (240)

10.6 (270)

—

M10

6.30 (160)

4.53 (115)

—

7.48 (190)

4.92 (125)

6.34 (161)

0.98 (25)

—

1.18 (30)

—

1.61 (41)

8.46 (215)

1.77 (45)

8.86 (225)

Mass [lbs] (kg) 40 (18) 44 (20) 55 (25)

460V Series Dimension Inverter type

DC Reactor type

FRN100G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-75B

FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-90B

FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-110B

FRN200G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-132B

FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-160B

FRN300G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-200B

FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX FRN450P11S-4UX FRN450G11S-4UX

DCR4-220B

FRN500G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-355B

FRN600G11S/P11S-4UX

DCR4-400B

FRN700P11S-4UX

DCR4-450B

FRN800P11S-4UX

Fig.

Fig. A

Fig. B

6.69 (170)

8.27 (210)

7.09 (180)

3.15 (80)

8.66 (220)

DCR4-315B

Fig. C

6.73 (171)

8.27 (210)

10.2 (260)

8.86 (225)

3.54 (90)

5.91 (150)

5.71 (145)

7.13 (181)

6.30 (160)

0.47 (12)

12.6 (320)

3.74 (95)

6.69 (170)

7.28 3.94 (185) (100)

9-7

9.84 (250) 10.2 (260) 11.4 (290) 11.6 (295) 11.8 (300)

3.35 (85) 5.31 (135)

7.48 (190)

9.45 (240)

0.39 (10)

4.72 (120)

5.51 (140)

DCR4-280B

DCR4-500B

7.87 (200)

Unit inch (mm)

11.0 (280)

φ12 12.6 (320) 13.0 (330) 13.8 (350) 14.6 (370) —

1.57 (40)

— — 13.4 (340)

—

1.97 (50)

φ15

Mass [lbs] (kg) 44 (20) 50 (23) 55 (25) 62 (28) 71 (32) 77 (35) 88 (40) 99 (45) 115 (52) 121 (55) 132 (60) 148 (67)

154 (70)

9-4 RS-485 Modbus RTU Serial Communications The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of inverter functions through an EIA/RS-485 connection. The serial interface is based on Modbus RTU protocol. This protocol allows the inverter to function as an RTU slave on an industrial network.

9-4-1 Transmission Specification Item Physical level Transmission distance Number of nodes Transmission speed Transmission mode Transmission protocol Character code Character length Error check

Specification EIA/RS-485 1600 ft (500 m) 32 total 19200, 9600, 4800, 2400 [bits/s] Half duplex Modbus RTU Binary 8 bits CRC

9-4-2 Connection Connection method Use shielded wire and connect to the control terminals (DX-, DX+ and SD). A termination resistor should be added between the data lines on the each end of the network. The value of the termination resistor depends on the characteristic impedance of the cable. A common value for termination resistors is 120 ohms.

Control terminals Terminal marking DX+ DXSD

Terminal name

Function description Input/output terminals for RS-485 communication.

RS-485 communication data (+) RS-485 communication data (â&#x20AC;&#x201C;) Cable shield

Electrically floating

9-4-3 Serial Interface Configuration Inverter function codes H30 to H39 are used to configure the serial interface parameters, such as device address, baud rate and error response.

9-4-4 Modbus RTU Functions The following RTU functions are supported. The maximum number of consecutive parameters for function 03 and 16 messages is 16. Code 03 06 16

Description Read Holding Registers (16 registers maximum) Preset Single Register Preset Multiple Registers (16 registers maximum)

9-8

9-4-5 Inverter Function Code Access All of the inverter function codes are accessible through the RS-485 serial interface. Inverter function codes are mapped to RTU holding registers. An inverter function code RTU address is 2 bytes in length. The high byte corresponds to a code that represents the inverter parameter sort (F–M). The low byte corresponds to the inverter parameter number within the sort (0 -99). Code 0 1 2 3 4

Sort F E C P H

Name Basic function Terminal function Control function Motor 1 function High level function

Code 5 6 7 8

Sort A o S M

Name Motor 2 function Option function Command/function data Monitor data

For example, inverter function code M11, output current, is addressed as RTU parameter number 080B hexadecimal or 2059 decimal.

9-4-6 Command and Monitor Data Registers

high byte inverter parameter sort code

low byte inverter parameter number

The command and monitor function codes are used to control the operation of the inverter and monitor the status variables through the serial interface. The command and monitor function codes are not accessible from the inverter keypad interface. Inverter parameter H30 and digital input signal LE must be enabled to operate the inverter from the Modbus interface. If LE is not assigned to a digital input (X1-X9), the signal will default to ON.

Frequency Setting Registers Address 1793

Code S01

Name Frequency command

Unit -

Variable Range

Min. unit

Read/ Write

Data Format

-20000–20000 (max. frequency at ± 20000) 0.00–400.00

1 R/W 2 1797 S05 Frequency command Hz 0.01 R/W 5 Note: 1) If both S01 and S05 are set, the inverter will ignore the setting of S05. 2) A data setting that exceeds the setting range is possible, but the actual action will be limited by the inverter configuration.

Operation command data Registers Address 1798 1799 1804

Code S06 S07 S12

Name Operation command Universal Do Universal Ao

Unit -

Variable Range Refer to the data format [14] Refer to the data format [15] -20000–20000 (100% output at ± 20000 )

Min. unit 1

Read/ Write R/W R/W R/W

Data Format 14 15 2

Note: 1) Since X1–X9 are configurable input commands, it is necessary to set the functions by E01–E09. 2) The alarm reset is executed, when RST signal changes from ON to OFF even if there are no alarms. 3) Universal Do is a function that utilizes the inverter’s digital outputs via communication.

Function data Registers Address

Code

1800 1801 1802

S08 S09 S10

1803

S11

Name Acceleration time F07 Deceleration time F08 Torque limit level 1 (driving) F40 Torque limit level 2 (braking) F41

Unit s s % %

Variable Range 0.1–3600.0 0.1–3600.0 20.00 –200.00, 999 (P11S:20.00-150.00) 0.00, 20.00–200.00, 999 (P11S:20.00-150.00)

Note: 1) The writing of data out of range is treated as out of range error. 2) Use a value of 7FFFH to enter 999 for torque limit functions.

9-9

0.1 0.1 1.00

Read/ Write R/W R/W R/W

Data Format 3 3 5

1.00

R/W

Min. unit

Monitoring parameter registers Address

Code

2049

M01

2053

M05

2054

Description

Unit

M06

Frequency command (final command) Frequency command (final command) Actual frequency

2055 2056 2057

M07 M08 M09

Actual torque value Torque current Output frequency

% % Hz

2058

M10

2059

M11

Motor output (input electric power) Output current r. m. s.

2060 2061

M12 M13

2062 2063

M14 M15

2064 2065 2066 2067 2068 2069 2071 2072 2073 2074

M16 M17 M18 M19 M20 M21 M23 M24 M25 M26

2075

M27

2079

M31

2080

M32

Output voltage r. m. s. Operation command (final command) Operating state Universal output terminal data Fault memory 0 Fault memory 1 Fault memory 2 Fault memory 3 Integrated operating time DC link voltage Type code Inverter capacity code ROM version Transmission error processing code Frequency command at alarm (final command) Frequency command at alarm (final command) Actual frequency at alarm

2081 2082 2083

M33 M34 M35

Actual torque at alarm Torque current at alarm Output frequency at alarm

% % Hz

2084

M36

2085

M37

2086

M38

2087

M39

2088 2089

M40 M41

2090

M42

2091 2092

M43 M44

2093 2094

M45 M46

2095

M47

2096

M48

Motor output at alarm (input power) Output current r.m.s. at alarm Output voltage effective value at alarm Operation command at alarm Operating state at alarm Universal output terminal data at alarm Integrated operation time at alarm DC link voltage at alarm Inverter internal air temp.at alarm Cooling fin temp. at alarm Life of main circuit capacitor. Life of printed circuit board capacitor. Life of cooling fan.

Range - 20000–20000 (max. frequency at ± 20000) 0.00–400.00 (P11S:0.00-120.00) - 20000–20000 (max. frequency at ± 20000) - 200.00–200.00 - 200.00–200.00 0.00–400.00 (P11S:0.00-120.00) 0.00–200.00

Read/ Write R

Data Format [2]

0.01

[5]

[2]

0.01 0.01 0.01

R R R

[6] [6] [5]

0.01

[5]

0.01

[5]

1.0 -

R R

[3] [14]

Min. unit

V -

0.00–200.00 (inverter rating at 100.00) 0.0–600.0 Refer to data format [14]

Refer to data format [16] Refer to data format [15]

R R

[16] [15]

Refer to data format [10]

[10]

h V -

0–65535 0–1000 Refer to data format [17] Refer to data format [11] 0–64999 Refer to data format [20]

1 1 1 -

R R R R R R

[1] [1] [17] [11] [1] [20]

- 20000–20000 (max. frequency at ±20000 ) 0.00–400.00 (P11S:0.00-120.00) - 20000–20000 (max. frequency at ± 20000) - 200.00 – 200.00 - 200.00 – 200.00 0.00 – 400.00 (P11S:0.00-120.00) 0.00–200.00

[2]

0.01

[5]

[2]

0.01 0.01 0.01

R R R

[6] [6] [5]

0.01

[5]

0.01

[5]

1.0

[3]

Hz -

0.00 – 200.00 (inverter rating at 100.00) 0.0 – 600.0

Refer to data format [14]

[14]

Refer to data format [16] Refer to data format [15]

R R

[16] [15]

0–65535

[1]

V °C

0–1000 0–120

1 1

R R

[1] [1]

°C %

0–120 0.0–100.0

1 0.1

R R

[1] [3]

0–65535

[1]

0–65535

[1]

9-10

9-4-7 Data Format Specification All data in the data field of communication frame shall be represented by a 16 bit length word. 15

16 bits binary data

Data format [1] Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 1 Example If F15 (Frequency limit, upper)= 60Hz 60 = 003CH Data format [2] Example data = -20 -20 = FFECH

Integer data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 1

Data format [3] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.1 Example: If F17 (frequency gain setting signal) = 100.0% 100.0 X 10 = 1000 = 03E8H Data format [4] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.1 Example If: C31 (Analog input offset adjust, terminal12) = - 5.0% - 5.0 X 10= - 50 = FFCEH Data format [5] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.01 Example: If C05 (multi-step frequency 1) = 50.25Hz 50.25 X 100 = 5025 = 13A1H Data format [6] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.01 Example: If M07 (actual torque value)= - 85.38% - 85.38 X 100= - 8538=DEA6H Data format [7] Unsigned Decimal data (Positive): Min. unit 0.001 Example: If o05 (follow - up side ASR 1 constant) = 0.105s 0.105 X 1000 = 105 = 0069H Data format [8] Decimal data (Positive, negative): Min. unit 0.001 Example: Data = -1.234 - 1.234 X 1000 = - 1234 = FB2EH Data format [9] Unsigned Integer data (Positive): Min. unit 2 Example If P01 (Motor 1 number of poles) =2pole 2 = 0002H

9-11

Data format [10] Code 0 1 2 3

Alarm Code Description

No alarm Overcurrent, during acceleration (INV output ) Overcurrent, during deceleration (INV output ) Overcurrent, during steady state operation (INV output ) Ground fault Overvoltage, during acceleration Over voltage, during deceleration Overvoltage, during steady state operation DC undervoltage Power supply open phase Blown DC fuse Output wiring error Overheat, heat sink, inverter Overheat, outside thermal Overheat, unit inside temp.

5 6 7 8 10 11 14 16 17 18 19

Data format [11]

Code 22 23 24 25

OC1 OC2 OC3 EF OU1 OU2 OU3 LU Lin FUS Er7 OH1 OH2 OH3

27 28 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Description Overheat, DB resistor Overload, motor 1 Overload, motor 2 Overload, inverter

dbH OL1 OL2 OLU

Overspeed PG wire break Memory error Keypad error CPU error Option comm. error Option error PL error Output wiring error RS-485 comm. error

OS Pg Er1 Er2 Er3 Er4 Er5 Er6 Er7 Er8

Capacity code

Code 7 15 25 50 100 200 300 500 750 1000 1500

Capacity (HP) 0.07(spare) 0.15(spare) 0.25 0.5 1 2 3 5 7.5 10 15

Data format [12]

Code 2000 2500 3000 4000 5000 6000 7500 10000 12500 15000

Capacity (HP) 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 125 150

Code 17500 20000 25000 30000 35000 40000 45000 50000 60600 60700 60800

Capacity (HP) 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800

Index data (ACC/DEC time, display coefficient)

Polarity

0: Positive (+), 1: Negative ( - )

Index portion

0: 0.01 1: 0.1 2: 1 3: 10

Data portion

X X X X

001–999 100–999 100–999 100–999

Example: If F07 (acceleration time 1) = 20.0 s 10.0 < 20< 99.9 → index =1 20.0 = 0.1 X 200 → 0400H + 00C8H = 04C8H

9-12

(0.00–9.99) (10.0–99.9) (100–999) (1000–9990)

Data format [13]

Pattern operation

Direction of rotation

Time

Index portion

0: 1st ACC/DEC time 1: 2nd ACC/DEC time 2: 3rd ACC/DEC time 3: 4th ACC/DEC time

0: FWD 1: REV

Data portion

0: 0.01 1: 0.1 2: 1 3: 10

X X X X

001–999 100–999 100–999 100–999

(0.00–9.99) (10.0–99.9) (100–999) (1000–9990)

Example) If C22 (Stage1) = 10.0s R2 (10s, reverse rotation, acceleration time 2/deceleration time 2) Since 10.0 = 0.1 X 100 > 9000H + 0400H + 0064H = 9464H Data format [14]

Operation command

RST

REV

FWD

(All bit are ON by 1) Example If S06 (operation command) = FWD, X1 and X5 = ON 0000 0000 0100 0101b = 0045H Data format [15]

Universal output terminal

(All bit are ON by 1) Example) If M15 (Universal output terminal)=Y1 and Y5 = ON 0000 0000 0001 0001b = 0011H Data format [16] 15

Operating state

BUSY

13 WR

ALM

DEC

ACC

NUV

BRK

INT

EXT

REV

FWD

(All bit are ON or active by 1) FWD: Forward operation REV: Reverse operation EXT: DC braking active (or pre-excitation) INT: BRK: NUV: TL: VL:

No Output Braking active DC link voltage is established (undervoltage at 0) Torque limiting Voltage limiting

9-13

IL: ACC: DEC: ALM: RL: WR:

Current limiting Under acceleration Under deceleration Inverter fault Transmission valid Function writing privilege 0: Keypad panel 1: RS-485 2: Fieldbus (option) BUSY: Processing data write

Data format [17] 15

Type code 13

Type

Type G P -

Data format [18] 14

Generation G11/P11 -

Series

Series USA -

Code 1 2 3

Voltage series

Voltage series 230V three phase 460V three phase 575V three phase -

Data 3

Data 2

Amperage value Decimal data (positive ): Min. unit 0.01 inverter capacity is not more than 30HP Min unit 0.01 for not less than 40HP

Example) If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)107.0A (40HP) 107.0 X 10=1070=042EH If F11 (electronics thermal overload relay 1 level)=3.60A (1HP) Since 3.60 X 100=360=0168H Data format [20]

Code setting (1â&#x20AC;&#x201C;4 figures)

Data 4

Data format [19]

Generation

Code 1 2 3 4 5 6

Transmission error code

Description FC (function code) error Illegal address Illegal address (Data range error)

Code 71 72 73

Description CRC error (no response) Parity error (no response) Other errors (no response) -Framing error -Overrun error -Buffer full error

NAK -Priority for comm. -No privilege for writing error -Forbidden writing error

9-14

1 Data 1

Data format [21]

Auto tuning

REV

FWD

Data portion

0: Without forward rotation command 1: With forward rotation command. 0: Without reverse rotation command. 1: With reverse rotation command. Example) If P04 (motor 1 auto - tuning)=1: Forward rotation 0000 0001 0000 0001b=0101H

9-4-8 Communication Errors Exception Response When the inverter receives a message that does not contain communication errors but the message can not be processed, the inverter will return an exception response. The exception response contains an error sub-code in the data field that represents the problem. Exception Response Errors Sub-Code 1 2

3 7

Name Illegal Function Illegal Data Address

Illegal Data Value Negative Acknowledge

Causes Received RTU Function other than 03, 06 or 16 • The starting parameter address is an unused inverter parameter. • The starting parameter address plus the offset refers to inverter parameter greater than the last parameter in a Function Code sort. • The number of registers is greater than 16. Data contains an out of range value for an inverter parameter • Requested data cannot be changed while the inverter is running. • The inverter parameter function is owned by the network interface option card and cannot be changed.

Communication errors Communication errors occur when the inverter receives an invalid message. The inverter will not return a response to a communication error. A code that represents the last communication error is stored in inverter parameter M26. Typical communication message errors include parity, framing, and CRC errors.

9-15

10. Options 10-1 Built-in Options The inverter supports two internally mounted cards. One option card is mounted under the main cover (Location A) and the other option card is mounted in a special adapter under the keypad (Location B). Only one card can be mounted in these locations. There are two different types of option cards, Type 1 and Type 2. You cannot use two Type 1 or Two Type 2 cards but you can mix any combination of Type 1 and Type 2 provided you only have one option per mounting location. Each option card must be mounted in the designated location. The chart below lists the option card, their types, and their mounting locations. Type

Loc

OPC-G11S-RY (Relay output card)

2nd Option Type/Loc 2/B

OPC-G11S-DIO (Digital interface card)

None

OPC-G11S-AIO (Analog interface card)

None

OPC-G11S-PG (PG Feedback Card) (G11S only)

2/B

OPC-G11S-PG2 (PG Feedback Card) (G11S only)

2/B

OPC-G11S-SY (Synchronized operation card) (G11S only) OPC-G11S-PDP (Communication card) OPC-G11S-DEV (Communication card) OPC-G11S-COP (Communication card) OPC-G11S-MBP (Communication card) OPC-G11S-IBS (Communication card)

2/B

• Relay output card The transistor output from the inverter control output terminals Y1 and Y4 are converted to the relay output (1SPDT). • Frequency setting by binary code (max. 16 bits) • Monitoring (8 bits) of frequency, output current, and output voltage • Auxiliary input for analog frequency setting (0 to +/-10 V) • Monitoring of inverter output frequency, current, and torque in analog voltage, analog output 0-10 VDC and 4-20mA • This will enable vector control by pulse generator feedback signal • Proportional operation, tuning operation (12/15 V; A, B Signal) • This will enable vector control by pulse generator feedback signal • Proportional operation, tuning operation (5V; A, not A, B, not B Signals) • Two motors are driven synchronously.

1/A

• Serial communication card for Profibus-DP

1/A

• Serial communication card for Device Net

1/A

• Serial communication card for CAN

1/A

• Serial communication card for Modbus plus

1/A

• Serial communication card for Interbus-S

Name

10-1

Function

10-2 Separately Installed Options Name (Type) Arrester (CN23232) (CN2324E) EMC compliance filter (FS5536-[][]-07) （EFL-[][]SP-2） (EFL-[][][]G11-4 ) (RF3[][][]-F11) Output circuit filter (OFL-[][][]-2) (OFL-[][][]-4) (OFL-[][][]-4A)

DC reactor (DCR2-[][][]) (DCR4-[][][])

Explanation

Installation Position

Absorbs power surges from the power source and protects the whole equipment connected to the power source. An exclusive filter to conform to the EMC Directive (emissions) in European standard. Note: Refer to the "Installation Manual" when installing the filter.

(For power coordination) ① Used when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500kVA and exceeds the rated capacity of the inverter tenfold. ② Used when a thyristor converter is connected as a common load on the same transformer. - If the commutating reactor is not used for the thyristor converter, an AC reactor is necessary at the inverter input side. Confirm. ③ Used to prevent an inverter OV trip from occurring when the phase advanced capacitor in the power line is switched on and off. ④ Used when the voltage imbalance exceeds 2%. =

3-phase average voltage [V]

x67%

U V W

L1/R

L2/S

L3/T

P(+)

Inverter

R S T Series connected reactor

Motor

R S T

U V W

Commutating reactor

Inverter

DC reactor

Power supply capacity

(SZ-Z[]) Frequency meter (TRM-45)(FM-60) Frequency setting device (VR) (RJ-13BA-2)(WA3W-1kΩ)

FAB or ELCB GFCI

Connected to the output circuit of the low-noise type inverter (Carrier frequency :8kHz to 15kHz, 6kHz when exceeding 40HP) and used for the following purposes. ① Voltage vibration suppression at the motor terminals. Prevent damage to the motor insulation by surge voltage for the 460V series inverter. ② Leakage current reduction on the output side wiring. Reduce leakage current by parallel operation by multiple motors or long-distance wiring. - Length of wiring should be 1300ft (400m) or less. ③ To reduce induced noise and radiating noise from output wiring. Effective in long-distance wiring such as plant lines. Note 1 : When OFL-[][][]-2 or OFL-[][][]-4 is connected, the setting value of the carrier frequency (F26) should be set to 8kHz or more. (6kHz or more when exceeding 40HP.) Note 2 : There is no restriction of carrier frequency (F26) when connecting the OFL-[][][]-4A.

Voltage unbalance [%] ( Max. Voltage [V] - Min. Voltage [V] )

Surge suppressor

Power supply

Thyristor converter

Power-factor improving capacitor

(For improving the input power-factor and reducing harmonics) Used to reduce the harmonic current (improvement of power-factor). * For details on the degree of reduction, see the materials attached to the guidelines, etc. For magnetic contactor [Product of Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.] Analog frequency meter (45, 60 square) [Product of Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.] Frequency setting variable resistor [Product of Fuji Electric Technica Co., Ltd.]

10-2

U V W

Motor

11. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 11-1 General In accordance with the provisions described in the European Commission Guidelines Document on Council Directive 89/336/EEC,Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. has chosen to classify the FRENIC 5000G11S range of Inverters as "Complex Components". Classification as a "Complex Components" allows a product to be treated as an "apparatus", and thus permits compliance with the essential requirements of the EMC Directive to be demonstrated to both an integrator of FRENIC Inverters and to his customer or the installer and the user. FRENIC Inverters is supplied `CE-marked', signifying compliance with EC Directive 89/336/EEC when fitted with specified filter units installed and earthed in accordance with this sheet. This Specification requires the following performance criteria to be met. EMC product standard

EN61800-3/1997 +A11/2000

Immunity : Second environment ( Industrial environment ) Emission : First environment ( Domestic environment ) Distribution class of Emission Unrestricted distribution Without OPC-G11S-*** FRN020G11S-4UX or less. FRN025P11S-4UX or less.

Restricted distribution Without OPC-G11S-*** FRN025G11S-4UX or more. FRN030P11S-4UX or more. FRN-G11S/P11S-2UX With OPC-G11S-*** FRN-G11S-2UX/4UX all models with OPC-G11S-***. Card option :OPC-G11S-AIO, DIO, PG, PGA, PG2, SY, RY, PGDIO, PGRY, TL Bus option :OPC-G11S-PDP, DEV, MBP, IBS, COP WARNING This is a product of the restricted sales distribution class according to IEC61800-3. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Finally, it is customerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s responsibility to check whether the equipment conforms to EMC directive.

11-1

11-2 Recommended Installation Instructions It is necessary that to conformed to EMC Directive, these instructions must be followed. Follow the usual safety procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical filter, Inverter and motor must be made by a qualified electrical technician.

connections to the

1) Use the correct filter according to Table 11-1. 2) Install the Inverter and filter in the electrically shielded metal wiring cabinet. 3) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter. Care should be taken to remove any paint etc. from the mounting holes and face area of the panel. This will ensure the best possible earthing of the filter. 4) Use the screened cable for the control , motor and other main wiring which are connected to the Inverter, and these screens should be securely earthed. 5) It is important that all wire lengths are kept as short as possible and that incoming mains and outgoing motor cables are kept well separated. " To minimize the conducted radio disturbance in the power distribution system, the length of the motor-cable should be as short as possible. " Table 11-1

RFI

Applied Inverter

filters Rated

Max.

RFI

Filter Type Current Rated

Dimensions LxWxH [inch (mm)]

Voltage

FRNF50G11S-4UX FRN001G11S-4UX FRN002G11S-4UX FRN003G11S-4UX FRN005G11S-4UX FRN007G11S/P11S-4UX FRN010G11S/P11S-4UX FRN015G11S/P11S-4UX FRN020G11S/P11S-4UX FRN025G11S/P11S-4UX FRN030G11S/P11S-4UX FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX FRN040G11S/P11S-4UX FRN050G11S/P11S-4UX FRN060G11S/P11S-4UX FRN075G11S/P11S-4UX FRN100G11S/P11S-4UX FRN125G11S/P11S-4UX FRN150G11S/P11S-4UX FRN200G11S/P11S-4UX FRN250G11S/P11S-4UX FRN300G11S/P11S-4UX FRN350G11S/P11S-4UX FRN400G11S/P11S-4UX FRN450G11S/P11S-4UX

FS5536-5-07 (EFL-0.75G11-4)

FS5536-12-07 (EFL-4.0G11-4)

12A

FS5536-35-07 (EFL-7.5G11-4) FS5536-50-07 (EFL-15G11-4) FS5536-72-07 (EFL-22G11-4) RF 3100-F11

filter Mount Dims Y x X [inch (mm)]

12.6(320)×4.57(116)×1.65(42)

11.54(293)×3.54(90)

12.6(320)×6.10(155)×1.77 (45)

11.54(293)×4.13(105)

13.43(341)×8.86(225)×1.87(47.5)

12.24(311)×6.58(167)

50A

19.69(500)×9.84(250)×2.76(70)

17.68(449)×7.28(185)

72A

19.69(500)×9.84(250)×2.76(70)

17.68(449)×7.28(185)

100A

17.13(435)×7.87(200)×5.12(130)

16.06(408)×6.54(166)

35A

RF 3180-F11

180A

RF 3280-F11

280A

RF 3400-F11

RF 3880-F11

3ph 480Vac

19.49(495)×7.87(200)×6.30(160)

18.43(468)×6.54(166)

9.84(250)×23.11(587)×8.07(205)

22.05(560)×3.35(85)

400A

9.84(250)×23.11(587)×8.07(205)

22.05(560)×3.35(85)

880A

27.09(688)×14.33(364)×7.09(180)

25.51(648)×5.90(150)

3ph 480Vac

11-2

Note

Fig. 11-1

Fig. 11-2

Fig. 11-3 Fig. 11-4

Fig.11-1

Dimensions [inch(mm)]

RF3100-F11 RF3180-F11

7.87 (200) 7.87 (200)

6.54 (166) 6.54 (166)

17.1 (435) 19.5 (495)

16.1 (408) 18.4 (468)

5.12 (130) 6.30 (160)

Fig.11-2 Outline Dimensions

11-3

(RF3100-F11, RF3180-F11)

23.1 (587)

3.35 (85) 3.35 (85)

8.07 (205)

1.57 (40)

9.84 (250)

22.0 (560)

Fig.11-3 Outline Dimensions

(RF3280-F11, RF3400-F11)

5.90 (150) 5.90 (150) 7.09 (180)

1.26 (32)

14.3 (364)

27.1 (688) 25.5 (648)

Fig.11-4 Outline Dimensions (RF3880-F11) Metal wiring cabinet

RCD or MCCB

RFI filter

Inverter

L1 L1’ L2 L2’ L3 L3’ PE

L1/R U L2/S V L3/T W

Screened Motor Cable

M Screening must be electrically continuous and earthed at the cabinet and the motor.

3ph Power supply

Motor

Fig.11-5

11-4

11-3 The harmonics restriction in Europe Union (EU) Combinations of the inverter with DC-reactor in table 11-2 fulfill the harmonics requirements of the EN 61000-3-2(+A14), which are European EN standard. However these inverters without DC-reactor don’t fulfill them. If they shall be connected to the public low voltage power supply system, the supply authority must be asked for permission to connect. Fuji Electric can provide this data sheets when you need the data for harmonics currents. Inverter model name FRNF50G11S-4UX FRN001G11S-4UX

Table 11-2

Applied DC-reactor model name DCR4-0.4 or DCRE4-0.4 DCR4-0.75 or DCRE4-0.75

Power supply Three-phase 460V

Middle voltage power supply system

User C Public MV/LV Transformer

Own MV/LV Transformer

Public low voltage Power supply system User A

Industrial low voltage Power supply system

User B

Inverter

1kW or less

This inverter must fulfill EN61000-3-2+A14 requirements or permission of the power supply authority is required if it doesn’t fulfill.

11-5

This inverter doesn’t need to fulfill EN61000-3-2+A14 requirements. No standard of harmonic current exists for the present.

App. Inverter Generating Loss FRENIC 5000G11 Watts Loss Model FRNF25G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-2UX FRN001G11S-2UX FRN002G11S-2UX FRN003G11S-2UX FRN005G11S-2UX FRN007G11S-2UX FRN010G11S-2UX FRN015G11S-2UX FRN020G11S-2UX FRN025G11S-2UX FRN030G11S-2UX FRN040G11S-2UX FRN050G11S-2UX FRN060G11S-2UX FRN075G11S-2UX FRN100G11S-2UX FRN125G11S-2UX FRNF50G11S-4UX FRN001G11S-4UX FRN002G11S-4UX FRN003G11S-4UX FRN005G11S-4UX FRN007G11S-4UX FRN010G11S-4UX FRN015G11S-4UX FRN020G11S-4UX FRN025G11S-4UX FRN030G11S-4UX FRN040G11S-4UX FRN050G11S-4UX FRN060G11S-4UX FRN075G11S-4UX FRN100G11S-4UX FRN125G11S-4UX FRN150G11S-4UX FRN200G11S-4UX FRN250G11S-4UX FRN300G11S-4UX FRN350G11S-4UX FRN400G11S-4UX FRN450G11S-4UX FRN500G11S-4UX FRN600G11S-4UX

FRENIC 5000P11 Watts Loss

Watts Loss [W] Low carrier High carrier frequency frequency 25 30*1 35 45*1 50 60*1 80 110*1 110 140*1 170 210*1 240 310*1 300 415*1 450 620*1 540 720*1 670 890*1 880 1160*1 950 1200*1 1200 1550*1 1400 1750*1 1600 2050*1 2150 2500*2 2600 3000*2 35 60*1 45 85*1 60 110*1 80 150*1 130 230*1 170 300*1 230 400*1 300 520*1 360 610*1 460 770*1 550 900*1 750 1250*1 950 1650*1 1100 1850*1 1300 2200*1 1550 2350*2 1950 2800*2 2400 3350*2 2650 3900*2 3250 4700*2 3900 5750*2 4350 6300*2 5450 7950*2 6150 8950*2 6700 9950*2 7750 11300*2

Model FRN007P11S-2UX FRN010P11S-2UX FRN015P11S-2UX FRN020P11S-2UX FRN025P11S-2UX FRN030P11S-2UX FRN040P11S-2UX FRN050P11S-2UX FRN060P11S-2UX FRN075P11S-2UX FRN100P11S-2UX FRN125P11S-2UX FRN150P11S-2UX FRN007P11S-4UX FRN010P11S-4UX FRN015P11S-4UX FRN020P11S-4UX FRN025P11S-4UX FRN030P11S-4UX FRN040P11S-4UX FRN050P11S-4UX FRN060P11S-4UX FRN075P11S-4UX FRN100P11S-4UX FRN125P11S-4UX FRN150P11S-4UX FRN200P11S-4UX FRN250P11S-4UX FRN300P11S-4UX FRN350P11S-4UX FRN400P11S-4UX FRN450P11S-4UX FRN500P11S-4UX FRN600P11S-4UX FRN700P11S-4UX FRN800P11S-4UX

Note) Lower carrier frequency : 2kHz *1 : 15kHz, *2 : 10kHz, *3 : 6kHz

A-1

Watts Loss [W] Low carrier High carrier frequency frequency 210 280*1 290 370*1 410 550*1 500 670*1 630 840*1 770 1030*1 950 1100*2 1250 1400*2 1500 1750*2 1700 1950*2 2200 2500*2 2650 2800*3 3200 3350*3 160 290*1 210 370*1 300 520*1 360 610*1 460 770*1 530 870*1 750 1050*2 950 1300*2 1100 1550*2 1350 1900*2 1800 2450*2 1850 2200*3 2400 2750*3 2900 3350*3 3250 3800*3 4250 4900*3 4350 5100*3 5100 5900*3 5700 6650*3 6900 8050*3 8050 9350*3 8900 10400*3 10300 12100*3

MEMO

2008-06 (K07/K07) 10CM